Owner’s Manual
Digital Camera
Model No. DC-G100
Please read these instructions carefully before using this product, and
save this manual for future use.
DVQP2173ZB
M0620KZ1110
Register online at
http://shop.panasonic.com/support
(U.S. customers only)
A firmware update has been made available to improve camera capabilities and to
add functionality.
• For information about functions that have been added or modified, refer to the
pages for “Firmware Update”.
Click here to move to “Firmware Update”.
2
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing Panasonic!
You have purchased one of the most sophisticated and reliable products on the
market today. Used properly, we’re sure it will bring you and your family years of
enjoyment. Please take time to fill in the information below. The serial number is on
the tag located on the underside of your camera. Be sure to retain this manual as
your convenient camera information source.
Date of Purchase Dealer Phone No.
Dealer Purchased From Model No.
Dealer Address Serial No.
Please note that the actual controls and components, menu items, etc. of your Digital
Camera may look somewhat different from those shown in the illustrations in this
Owner’s Manual.
Carefully observe copyright laws.
Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for
purposes other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the
purpose of private use, recording of certain material may be restricted.
Finding the Information You Need
You can find the information you need by looking at the following pages in this
document.
Contents
6
Contents by Function
16
Names of Parts
26
Menu Guide
307
Index
500
3
About Operating Instructions
Symbols Used in This Document
Black icons show conditions in which these can be used, and gray icons show
conditions in which these cannot be used.
Example:
/
Recording mode Pictures · Videos
Operating symbols
Front dial
Cursor button up/down/left/right
[MENU/SET] button
Control dial
• Other symbols, such as icons shown on the camera screen, are also used in
explanations.
• This document describes the procedure for selecting menu items as follows:
Example) Set [Quality] of the [Rec] menu to [
].
[ ] [Quality] Select [ ]
4
About Operating Instructions
Notification classification symbols
To confirm prior to using the function
Hints for better use of the camera and tips for recording
Notifications and supplementary items regarding specifications
Related information and page number
• The images and drawings of this document are an illustration to explain the
functions.
• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens
(H-FS12032).
5
1. Introduction 20
2. Getting Started 30
3. Basic Operations 48
4. Recording Mode 74
5. Image Recording 117
6. Focus/Zoom 124
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 157
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/
Picture effect
207
9. Flash 226
10. Recording Videos 238
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images 270
12. Camera Customization 291
13. Menu Guide 307
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 371
15. Connecting to Other Devices 432
16. Materials 447
Chapters
6
About Operating Instructions ..................................................... 3
Chapters .................................................................................... 5
Contents by Function ............................................................... 16
1. Introduction 20
Before Use ............................................................................... 20
Standard Accessories .............................................................. 22
Lenses That Can Be Used ....................................................... 23
Memory Cards That Can Be Used ........................................... 24
Names of Parts ........................................................................ 26
Camera ............................................................................................26
Lens .................................................................................................28
Tripod grip ........................................................................................29
Monitor Displays ..............................................................................29
2. Getting Started 30
Attaching a Shoulder Strap ...................................................... 30
Charging the Battery ................................................................ 31
Battery Insertion ............................................................................... 31
Charging battery ..............................................................................33
Notifications Regarding Charging ....................................................35
[Economy] ........................................................................................ 37
Inserting Cards (Optional) ........................................................ 39
Formatting Cards (Initialization) ....................................................... 40
Attaching a Lens ...................................................................... 41
Extending/retracting the lens <when the interchangeable lens
(H-FS12032) is attached> ................................................................43
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and Angle ............................... 44
Setting the Clock (When Turning On for the First Time) .......... 45
Contents
7
Contents
3. Basic Operations 48
Basic Recording Operations .................................................... 48
How to Hold the Camera ..................................................................48
Taking Pictures .................................................................................50
Recording Videos .............................................................................51
Selecting the Recording Mode .........................................................52
Camera Setting Operations ..................................................... 53
Display Settings ....................................................................... 55
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ...................................................... 55
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder ............................... 56
Switching the Display Information ....................................................58
Quick Menu .............................................................................. 61
Monitor recording information screen ...................................... 63
Menu Operation Methods ........................................................ 65
[Reset] ..............................................................................................67
Recording Using Touch Functions ........................................... 68
Touch AF/Touch Shutter ................................................................... 68
Touch AE ..........................................................................................69
Recording with the Tripod grip ................................................. 70
Attaching the Hand Strap .................................................................70
Attaching the camera to a tripod grip ............................................... 71
Using as a grip ................................................................................. 72
Using as a tripod .............................................................................. 73
8
Contents
4. Recording mode 74
Intelligent Auto Mode ............................................................... 74
[Intelligent Auto] menu .....................................................................79
Taking pictures with different color tones, degrees of blurriness,
and brightness .................................................................................81
Self Shot Mode ([Self Shot]) .................................................... 83
Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot]) ...........................................86
4K Selfie ...........................................................................................87
Program AE Mode.................................................................... 91
Aperture-Priority AE Mode ....................................................... 93
Shutter-Priority AE Mode ......................................................... 96
Manual Exposure Mode ........................................................... 98
Live View Composite Recording ....................................................101
Preview Mode ........................................................................ 104
Scene Guide Mode ................................................................ 105
Types of Scene Guide Mode .......................................................... 107
Creative Control Mode ........................................................... 110
Types and adjustments of filter effects ............................................111
Taking pictures with different degrees of blurriness
and brightness ............................................................................... 115
5. Image Recording 117
[Aspect Ratio]......................................................................... 117
[Picture Size] .......................................................................... 118
[Quality] .................................................................................. 119
[Folder / File Settings] ............................................................ 121
[No.Reset] .............................................................................. 123
9
Contents
6. Focus/Zoom 124
Selecting the Focus Mode ..................................................... 124
Using AF ................................................................................ 126
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)] ...................................................................128
Selecting the AF Mode ........................................................... 129
[Face/Eye Detection] ......................................................................131
[Tracking] .......................................................................................133
[49-Area] ........................................................................................135
Custom Multi (Horizontal, Vertical, Center) .................................... 136
Custom Multi (C1 to C3) ................................................................138
[1-Area] ..........................................................................................139
[Pinpoint] ........................................................................................ 140
Moving the AF Area by Touch ................................................ 142
Optimizing the focus and brightness to the touched position .........142
Moving the AF Area during Viewfinder Display ..............................144
Record Using Manual Focus.................................................. 146
Recording with Zoom ............................................................. 151
Extended Tele Conversion .............................................................152
[Digital Zoom] ................................................................................. 155
Power Zoom Lens .......................................................................... 156
10
Contents
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer 157
Selecting the Drive Mode ....................................................... 157
Taking Burst Pictures ............................................................. 158
4K Photo Recording ............................................................... 162
Selecting Pictures from a 4K Burst File ................................. 168
Picture Selection Operations .........................................................170
Post-Focus Recording ........................................................... 176
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save ..........................179
Focus Stacking ..............................................................................181
Recording Using the Self-timer .............................................. 184
Recording with Time Lapse Shot ........................................... 187
Recording with Stop Motion Animation .................................. 190
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation Videos ................... 193
Bracket Recording ................................................................. 195
[Silent Mode] .......................................................................... 201
[Shutter Type] ......................................................................... 202
Image Stabilizer ..................................................................... 204
Image Stabilizer Settings ...............................................................205
11
Contents
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect 207
[Metering Mode] ..................................................................... 207
Exposure Compensation........................................................ 208
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock) .......................... 210
ISO Sensitivity........................................................................ 212
White Balance (WB)............................................................... 215
Adjusting the White Balance .......................................................... 219
[Photo Style]........................................................................... 221
[Filter Settings] ....................................................................... 224
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] ................................................... 225
9. Flash 226
Using a Flash ......................................................................... 226
Setting Flash .......................................................................... 227
[Flash Mode] ..................................................................................227
[Flash Adjust.] ................................................................................231
[Flash Synchro] .............................................................................. 232
[Auto Exposure Comp.] .................................................................. 233
[Red-Eye Removal] ........................................................................ 233
Recording Using a Wireless Flash ......................................... 234
12
Contents
10. Recording Videos 238
Recording Videos ................................................................... 238
Taking pictures while a video is being recorded .............................242
Creative Video Mode ............................................................. 244
[4K Live Cropping] .........................................................................247
Slow & Quick Mode................................................................ 250
Slow & Quick Menu ........................................................................253
Snap Movies .......................................................................... 255
Video Settings (Auto Focus) .................................................. 259
[Continuous AF] .............................................................................259
[AF Custom Setting(Video)] ...........................................................260
Video Settings (Brightness) ................................................... 261
[Luminance Level] .......................................................................... 261
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] ..................................................................262
Video Settings (Audio) ........................................................... 263
[Sound Rec Level Disp.] ................................................................263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.] ................................................................... 263
[Wind Noise Canceller] ..................................................................264
[Lens Noise Cut] ............................................................................264
[Built-in Mic] ...................................................................................265
[Built-in Mic Indicator] .....................................................................266
Video Settings (Display) ......................................................... 267
[Zebra Pattern] ............................................................................... 267
[Frame Marker] ..............................................................................268
Log Recording........................................................................ 269
13
Contents
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images 270
Playing Back Pictures ............................................................ 270
Playing Back Videos .............................................................. 272
Extracting a Picture ........................................................................ 274
Switching the Display Mode ................................................... 275
Enlarged Display ............................................................................ 275
Thumbnail Screen .......................................................................... 276
Calendar Playback ......................................................................... 277
Group Images ........................................................................ 278
Deleting Images ..................................................................... 279
[Light Composition] ................................................................ 280
[Sequence Composition] ........................................................ 282
[Clear Retouch] ...................................................................... 284
[RAW Processing] .................................................................. 286
[Video Divide] ......................................................................... 290
12. Camera Customization 291
Fn Buttons.............................................................................. 292
[Dial Operation Switch] .......................................................... 297
Quick Menu Customization .................................................... 299
Custom Mode......................................................................... 303
My Menu ................................................................................ 305
14
Contents
13. Menu Guide 307
List of Menu ........................................................................... 308
Menus displayed in specific recording modes ....................... 312
[Intelligent Auto] menu ...................................................................312
[Creative Video] menu ...................................................................312
[Slow & Quick] menu ......................................................................313
[Scene Guide] menu ......................................................................313
[Creative Control] menu ................................................................. 313
[Rec] Menu............................................................................. 314
[Motion Picture] Menu ............................................................ 327
[Custom] Menu....................................................................... 331
[Setup] Menu.......................................................................... 352
[Playback] Menu .................................................................... 360
Entering Characters ............................................................... 370
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth 371
Connecting to a Smartphone ................................................. 373
Operating the Camera with a Smartphone ............................ 386
Displaying still pictures on a TV ............................................. 398
Sending Images from the Camera ......................................... 400
Wi-Fi Connections.................................................................. 418
Send Settings and Selecting Images ..................................... 424
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ................................................................ 427
15. Connecting to Other Devices 432
Viewing on a TV ..................................................................... 434
Recording while monitoring camera images .................................. 437
Importing Images to a PC ...................................................... 438
Copying Images to a PC ................................................................ 438
Installing Software ..........................................................................440
Storing on a Recorder ............................................................ 443
Printing ................................................................................... 444
15
Contents
Index ...................................................................................... 500
Trademarks and Licenses ...................................................... 507
16. Materials 447
Using Optional Accessories ................................................... 447
External Flash (optional) ................................................................ 447
External Microphones (Optional) ...................................................448
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional) ...............................451
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays ................................................... 452
Recording Screen ..........................................................................452
Playback Screen ............................................................................ 457
Message Displays .................................................................. 460
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 463
Cautions for Use .................................................................... 474
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken and
Available Recording Time with the Battery ............................ 484
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken and
Video Recording Time with Cards .......................................... 487
List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each
Recording Mode..................................................................... 488
Specifications ......................................................................... 492
16
Power Source
Charging
31
Charging error
34
Battery indication
35
Power save function
37
Number of pictures that
can be taken, available
recording time
484
Card
Cards that can be used
24
[Format]
40
Folder structure
439
[Folder / File Settings]
121
[No.Reset]
123
Entering characters
370
Number of pictures, length
of recording time
487
Lens
Attaching
41
Tripod Grip
Attaching, usage
70
Basic Settings
[Language]
358
[Clock Set]
45
[World Time]
352
[Beep]
354
[Reset]
67
Viewfinder
Diopter adjustment
55
Eye sensor
56
[Eye Sensor AF]
332
Display
Recording screen
452
Playback screen
457
Monitor/Viewfinder
29
452
Monitor recording
information screen
63
456
Switching display
58
Monitor/viewfinder
adjustment
356
Monitor/viewfinder
luminance
356
Display speed
355
Level gauge
59
Grid lines
343
[Histogram]
343
[Highlight]
344
AF/MF
Focus mode
124
[Continuous AF]
259
Selecting the AF mode
129
Face/eye detection
131
Movement tracking
133
[AF-ON]
211
Setting the AF sensitivity
128
327
AF/AE Lock
210
Touch AF
68
142
[Touch Pad AF]
144
[AF Assist Lamp]
333
[MF]
146
[MF Guide]
345
[MF Assist]
336
[Peaking]
342
Contents by Function
17
Contents by Function
Image Stabilizer
[Stabilizer]
204
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
205
Drive
Drive mode
157
[Burst]
158
[4K PHOTO]
162
[Post Focus]
176
[Self Timer]
184
[Time Lapse Shot]
187
Recording with Stop Motion
Animation
190
Image Quality
[Picture Size]
118
[Quality]
119
RAW
119
JPEG
119
[Aspect Ratio]
117
[White Balance]
215
[Photo Style]
221
[Filter Settings]
224
[Color Space]
315
[Highlight Shadow]
316
[i.Dynamic]
317
[i.Resolution]
317
[Long Shtr NR]
320
[Shading Comp.]
320
[Diffraction Compensation]
321
[HDR]
323
Taking Pictures
Self Shot Mode
83
Recording mode
52
Quick menu
61
Zoom
151
Extended Tele Conversion
([Rec])
152
Bracket recording
195
Time recording
100
Live View Composite
Recording
101
[Multi Exp.]
325
[Shutter Type]
202
[Silent Mode]
201
Screen display
452
Exposure
[Exposure Comp.]
208
Program Shift
92
Preview mode
104
[Metering Mode]
207
AE Lock
210
[One Push AE]
294
[Touch AE]
69
ISO Sensitivity
212
[Extended ISO]
331
Flash
[Flash Mode]
227
[Flash Adjust.]
231
[Flash Synchro]
232
[Wireless Flash Setup]
234
External flash
447
18
Contents by Function
Video Recording
Video recording
238
Taking pictures while a
video is being recorded
242
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
154
Creative Video mode
244
[4K Live Cropping]
247
Slow & Quick Mode
250
[Snap Movie]
255
Log recording (V-Log L)
269
Display (Video)
[Zebra Pattern]
267
[Frame Marker]
268
Image Quality (Video)
[Rec Quality]
239
[Flkr Decrease]
329
Exposure (Video)
Exposure settings
244
[S&Q Exposure Mode]
253
[Luminance Level]
261
Audio
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
263
Mute
263
Wind noise reduction
264
Built-in microphone setting
([Self Shot])
86
[Built-in Mic]
265
[Built-in Mic Indicator]
266
External microphone
448
[Wind Cut]
450
Playback
[Auto Review]
340
Playing back pictures
270
Playing back videos
272
Thumbnail display
276
Calendar display
277
Enlarged display
275
Group images
278
Saving 4K photos
168
Viewing on a TV
434
Deleting
279
Screen display
457
[Slide Show]
361
Editing of Images
Focus Stacking
181
[Light Composition]
280
[Sequence Composition]
282
[Clear Retouch]
284
[RAW Processing]
286
[Protect]
362
[Cropping]
367
[Rating]
362
[Resize]
366
[Rotate]
367
[Video Divide]
290
Customization
[Custom] menu
331
Function button
292
Custom recording mode
303
My Menu
305
Quick menu
299
Dial operation
297
19
Contents by Function
Connecting with Other Devices
Sending images (PC)
438
Printing
444
Viewing on a TV
434
HDMI output
432
437
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Bluetooth connection
375
Wi-Fi connection
380
418
[Wi-Fi Setup]
427
Smartphone app “LUMIX
Sync”
373
[Remote shooting]
387
Location information
395
Sending images
([Smartphone])
391
404
Sending images ([PC])
407
Sending images ([Printer])
410
Sending images ([AV
device])
412
Sending images ([Web
service])
414
Sending images ([Cloud
Sync. Service])
416
“LUMIX CLUB”
428
Software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
441
“SILKYPIX”
442
Maintenance
[Pixel Refresh]
359
20
1. Introduction
Before Use
Firmware of Your Camera/Lens
Firmware updates may be provided in order to improve camera capabilities or to add
functionality. For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the
camera/lens to the latest version.
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the
firmware, visit the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
• To check the firmware version of the camera/lens, attach the lens to the camera
and select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup] menu.
• This document provides explanations for camera firmware version 1.0.
Handling of the Camera
When using the camera, be careful not to drop it, bump it, or apply
undue force. These may cause malfunction or damage to the camera
and lens.
The camera is not dust resistant, splash resistant, or waterproof.
Avoid using the camera in places with excessive dust or sand, or
where water can come into contact with the camera.
If sand, dust, or liquids such as water droplets adhere to the monitor,
wipe them off with a dry soft cloth.
– Touch operations may be incorrectly recognized.
Do not place a hand inside the camera mount.
This may cause a failure or damage because the sensor is a
precision device.
21
1. Introduction
Condensation (When the Lens, the Viewfinder or Monitor
is Fogged Up)
• Condensation occurs when there are temperature or humidity differences. Take
care as this may lead to soiling, mold, and malfunctions in the lens, viewfinder, and
monitor.
• If condensation occurs, turn off the camera and leave it for approx. 2 hours. The
fog will disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to
the ambient temperature.
Be Sure to Perform Trial Recording in Advance
Perform trial recording in advance of an important event (wedding, etc.) to check that
recording can be performed normally.
No Compensation Regarding Recording
Please note that compensation cannot be provided in the event that recording could
not be performed due to a problem with the camera or a card.
Be Careful with Regard to Copyrights
Under copyright law, you may not use the images and audio you have recorded for
other than personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder.
Be careful because there are cases where restrictions apply to recording even for the
purpose of personal enjoyment.
Also Read “Cautions for Use” (474)
22
1. Introduction
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where
the camera was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Owner’s Manual <Basic>” (supplied).
• Digital camera body is referred to as camera in this document.
• Battery pack is referred to as battery pack or battery in this document.
• The memory card is optional.
• Please dispose of all packaging appropriately.
• Keep small parts in a safe place out of the reach of children.
23
1. Introduction
Lenses That Can Be Used
This unit can use the dedicated lenses
compatible with the Micro Four Thirds™
System lens mount specification (Micro Four
Thirds mount).
You can also use a lens of any of the
following standards by attaching a mount
adaptor.
Lens Mount adaptor
Four Thirds™ mount
specification lens
Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)
Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)
Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)
About the lens and functions
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as Auto Focus, Image Stabilizer,
and zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
• Refer to catalogs/websites for most current information regarding supported
lenses.
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
• The focal length noted on the Micro Four Thirds lens is equivalent to double
when converted to the 35 mm film camera. (It will be equivalent to 100 mm
lens when a 50 mm lens is used.)
24
1. Introduction
Memory Cards That Can Be Used
You can use the following memory cards with this camera.
• SD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to by
the generic name of card in this document.
SD memory card
(512 MB to 2 GB)
• The camera supports SDHC/SDXC memory cards
compliant with UHS Speed Class 3 of the UHS-I
standard.
• Operation with the Panasonic cards on the left has
been verified.
SDHC memory card
(4 GB to 32 GB)
SDXC memory card
(48 GB to 128 GB)
When using the following functions, use cards that have the correct SD
Speed Class, UHS Speed Class and Video Speed Class.
• Speed classes are standards to guarantee the minimum speed necessary for
continuous writing.
Function [Rec Quality] Speed Class
Example of
indication
Video recording
[FHD]/[HD] Class 4 or higher
[4K] UHS Speed Class 3
Video Speed Class 30 or
higher
[4K PHOTO]/
[Post Focus]
—
25
1. Introduction
• You can prevent the writing and deleting of data by
setting the write-protect switch
on the card to
“LOCK”.
• The data stored on a card may be damaged due to
electromagnetic waves, static electricity or a failure
of the camera or card. We recommend backing up
important data.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to
prevent swallowing.
26
1. Introduction
Names of Parts
Camera
1
Shoulder strap eyelet (30)
2
[ ] (Exposure compensation)
button (208)/
Fn button (Fn1) (292)
3
Charging lamp (34)/
WIRELESS connection lamp
(354, 371)
4
Camera on/off switch (45)
5
Mode dial (52)
6
Stereo microphone (263)
• Do not block the microphone
with a finger. Audio will be
difficult to record.
7
Front dial (53)
8
Shutter button (50)
9
Video rec. button (51, 238)
10
[ ] (Recording distance
reference mark) (150)
11
Flash (48, 226)
12
Hot shoe (hot shoe cover) (447)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out
of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
13
[LVF] button (56)
Fn button (Fn3) (292)
14
[ ] ([Send Image (Smartphone)])
button (406)/
Fn button (Fn4) (292)
15
[MIC] socket (448)
16
Speaker (354)
17
Self-timer light (184)/
AF assist light (333)
18
Lens release button (42)
19
Lens lock pin
20
Mount
21
Sensor
22
Contact points
23
Lens fitting mark (41)
15
16
6
1
89
23 22 2120 1918 17
10 7
2 4 5
11 12 13 14 1
3
27
1. Introduction
• Use [Fn5] to [Fn9] (Touch Icons) (296)
24
Diopter adjustment dial (55)
25
Eye cup (476)
26
Viewfinder (56, 452)
27
Eye sensor (56)
28
Cursor buttons (54)
[
] (ISO sensitivity) ( )
(212)
[
] (White balance) ( ) (215)
[
] (Drive mode) ( ) (157)
[
] (AF Mode) ( ) (126)
29
[MENU/SET] button (54, 65)
30
[ ] (Delete) button (279)/
[Q.MENU] button (61)/
[
] (Cancel) button (66)/
Fn button (Fn2) (292)
31
[ ] (Playback) button (270)
32
Control dial (53)
33
[DISP.] button (58)
34
[HDMI] socket (432)
35
[USB/CHARGE] socket (33, 433)
36
Card/Battery door (31, 39)
37
Release lever (31, 39)
38
DC Coupler cover (451)
• When using an AC adaptor,
ensure that the Panasonic DC
Coupler (DMW-DCC11: optional)
and AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10:
optional) are used.
39
Tripod mount (70, 481)
• If you attempt to attach a tripod
with a screw length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more, you may not
be able to securely fix it in place
or it may damage the camera.
40
Monitor (29, 452)/
Touch screen (54)
24 2526 27
31
33
32
28
29
30
34
35
373839 3640
29
1. Introduction
Tripod grip
1
9
5
3 4
6
7
2
8
1
Camera screw
2
Camera stand
3
Fastening knob
4
Hand strap eyelet
5
Video rec. button
6
Shutter button
7
Sleep button
8
Grip
9
Connection cable
• For information on how to attach the camera and operate the tripod grip, refer to
page 70.
Monitor Displays
At the time of purchase, the monitor displays the following icons.
• For information about the icons other than those described here, refer to page 452.
60
p
30
2. Getting Started
Attaching a Shoulder Strap
Attach a shoulder strap to the camera with the following procedure to
prevent it from dropping.
1 2
3 4
• Pull the shoulder strap and check that it will not come out.
• Attach the opposite end of the shoulder strap with the same procedure.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
31
2. Getting Started
Charging the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera and charge it.
• The battery that can be used with the camera is DMW-BLG10. (As of
June 2020)
• The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery
before use.
• Check that this unit is turned off.
Battery Insertion
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries (DMW-BLG10).
• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.
1 2
3 4
Make sure to insert the battery in the correct orientation.
Check that the lever is holding the battery in place.
32
2. Getting Started
Removing the Battery
Push the lever in the direction of the
arrow.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will drain if left inserted in the camera for a long period of time.)
• To remove the battery, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX
indicator on the screen goes off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to
malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.)
• The battery becomes warm after use, during charging, and immediately
after charging.
The camera also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
33
2. Getting Started
Charging battery
Charging time Approx. 190 min.
• Using the camera body and the supplied AC adaptor.
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged
completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not
been used for a long time may be longer than normal.
• Use the products supplied with the camera for charging.
1
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
• The camera cannot be charged when it is turned on.
2
Insert the battery into the camera.
3
Connect the camera [USB/CHARGE] socket and the AC
adaptor using the USB connection cable.
• Hold the plugs and insert them straight in or pull them straight out.
(Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
4
Insert the AC adaptor into the electrical outlet.
• The charging lamp blinks red and charging begins. (34)
34
2. Getting Started
Charging lamp indications
Charging lamp (Red)
On: Charging in progress
Off: Charging complete
Flashing: Charging error
• You can also charge the battery by connecting a USB device (PC, etc.) and
the camera with the USB connection cable.
In that case, charging may take a while.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• After charging, disconnect the connection to the power source.
• When the charging lamp is blinking, the battery is not charging properly.
– The temperature of the battery or surroundings is either too high or too
low. Try charging at an ambient temperature between 10 °C and 30 °C
(50 °F and 86 °F).
– The terminals of the battery are dirty.
Remove the battery and wipe off the dirt with a dry cloth.
• Even when the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF] thus turning the camera
off, it consumes power.
When the camera will not be used for a long time, remove the power plug
from the electrical outlet in order to save power.
35
2. Getting Started
Notifications Regarding Charging
Power Indications
60
p
75% or higher
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
24% or below
Blinking in
red
Low battery
• Charge or replace the battery.
• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate.
36
2. Getting Started
• To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a genuine
Panasonic battery pack is used. There is a possibility that other
battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we
are not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of
a counterfeit battery pack.
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the
power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or
the resulting heat generated.
• Do not use the AC adaptor or USB connection cables on other devices.
This may cause a malfunction.
• Do not use USB extension cables or USB conversion adaptors.
• The battery can be charged even when it still has some charge left, but it is
not recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the
battery is fully charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
• If there is a power outage or other problem with the electrical outlet, then
charging may not complete successfully.
Reconnect the power plug.
• Do not connect to keyboard or printer USB ports, or to USB hubs.
• If the connected PC enters sleep status, then charging may stop.
37
2. Getting Started
[Economy]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep (power save)
status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no operation is performed for a
set time. Reduces battery consumption.
[ ] Select [Economy]
[Sleep Mode] Sets the amount of time until the camera is put to sleep.
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]
Sets the camera to sleep 15 minutes after being
disconnected from Wi-Fi.
[Auto LVF/Monitor
Off]
Sets the amount of time it takes for the viewfinder/monitor
to turn off.
(The camera is not turned off.)
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
Puts the camera to sleep when the recording screen is
being displayed on the monitor when automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching is active.
[Time]
Sets the amount of time until the camera is
put to sleep.
[Display]
Sets the screen where the camera is put to
sleep.
[Only Monitor Info.]:
Puts the camera to sleep only when the
control panel (58) is displayed.
[All Live View]:
Puts the camera to sleep from any screen
during recording standby.
• To recover from [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)], or [Power Save LVF Shooting],
perform one of the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and then [ON] again.
• To recover from [Auto LVF/Monitor Off], press any button.
38
2. Getting Started
• [Economy] is not available in the following cases:
– While connected to a PC or printer
– During video recording/video playback
– When recording with [4K Pre-Burst]
– During a [Time Lapse Shot]
– When recording with [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is
set)
– When recording with [Live View Composite]
– When recording with [Multi Exp.]
– During a [Slide Show]
– During HDMI output for recording
39
2. Getting Started
Inserting Cards (Optional)
• Make sure that the camera is turned off.
1 2
3
Do not touch the card connection
contacts.
Card Access Indications
The access indication displays red while the card is
being accessed.
Removing a Card
Push the card until it clicks and then
pull the card out straight.
Press
Pull out
40
2. Getting Started
• To remove the card, turn the camera off and wait until the LUMIX
indicator on the screen goes off. (Failure to wait may cause the camera to
malfunction and may damage the card or recorded data.)
• The card may be warm just after the camera has been used. Be careful
when removing.
• Do not perform the following operations during access.
The camera may operate incorrectly or the card and recorded images
may be damaged.
– Turn off the camera.
– Remove the battery or card, or disconnect the AC adaptor (optional) or
DC coupler (optional).
– Subject the camera to vibration, impacts, or static electricity.
Formatting Cards (Initialization)
Format the cards with the camera before use.
• When a card is formatted, all of the data stored in the card is erased
and cannot be restored.
Save a backup of necessary data before formatting the card.
[ ] Select [Format]
• Do not turn off the camera or perform another operation during formatting.
• Take care not to turn off the camera while formatting is in progress.
• If the card has been formatted with a PC or other device, format it again with
the camera.
41
2. Getting Started
Attaching a Lens
• Make sure that the camera is turned off.
• Change the lens in a location where there is not a lot of dirt and dust. If dirt
or dust gets on the lens, refer to page 475.
• Change the lens while the lens cap is attached.
• When attaching or detaching the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032), retract
the lens barrel.
Align the lens fitting marks on the lens and camera and
then rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow.
● Attach the lens by rotating it until it clicks.
1 2
• Insert the lens straight in.
Inserting this at an angle to attach it may damage the camera lens mount.
42
2. Getting Started
Removing a Lens
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
While pressing the lens release button ,
rotate the lens in the direction of the arrow
until it stops and then remove it.
• After removing the lens, be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear
cap.
43
2. Getting Started
Extending/retracting the lens
<when the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is
attached>
How to Extend the Lens
Rotate the zoom ring in the direction
of arrow
from position (the lens
is retracted) to position
<12 mm to
32 mm> to extend the lens.
• When the lens barrel is retracted, images
cannot be recorded.
The lens is retracted
How to Retract the Lens
Rotate the zoom ring in the direction
of arrow
from position <12 mm to
32 mm> to position
to retract the lens.
• The zoom ring will seem to click into the
12 mm position, but continue to rotate the lens
until it reaches position
.
• When you are not recording images, we
recommend that you retract the lens.
The lens is extended
44
2. Getting Started
Adjusting the Monitor Direction and
Angle
At the time of purchase, the monitor is stowed in the camera body. Turn
the monitor surface out before use.
180°
180°
Free angle shooting
You can rotate 180° towards the lens and 90° downwards.
Taking pictures at a low angle Taking pictures at a high angle
Taking pictures of yourself
If you rotate the monitor as shown in
the figure, the camera will switch to
Self Shot Mode. (83)
• The angles of adjustment are only guides.
• Do not apply an excessive force to the monitor. This may cause damage or
malfunction.
• When not using the camera, close the monitor with the monitor surface
facing in.
45
2. Getting Started
Setting the Clock
(When Turning On for the First Time)
When you turn the camera on for the first time, a screen to set the clock
and home area appears.
Be sure to set these settings before use to ensure images are recorded
with the correct date and time information.
1
Set the camera on/off switch
to [ON].
● If the language select screen is not
displayed, proceed to Step
4.
2
When [Please set the language] appears, press .
3
Set the language.
● Press to select the language and then press .
4
When [Please set the clock] appears, press .
5
Set the clock.
: Select an item (year, month,
day, hour or minute).
: Select a value.
To set the display order and time
display format
.
● Press to select the time zone
[Style] and then press
, the
screen for setting the display order
and time display format appears.
46
2. Getting Started
6
Confirm your selection.
● Press .
7
When [The clock setting has been completed.] appears,
press
.
8
When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press .
9
Set the home area.
● Press to select your home area
and press
.
• If you are using Daylight Savings
[
], press . (The time will move
forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press
again.
Time difference from GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time)
● When an interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used and the lens
barrel is retracted, recording is not possible (a message will be
displayed). Rotate the zoom ring to extend the lens. (43)
47
2. Getting Started
• If the camera is used without setting the clock, it will be set to 0:00:00,
January 1st, 2020.
• Clock settings are maintained for approx. 3 months using the built-in clock
battery even without the battery.
(Leave the fully-charged battery in the camera for approx. 24 hours to
charge the built-in battery.)
• [Clock Set] can be changed from the menu:
– [
] [Clock Set]
48
3. Basic Operations
Basic Recording Operations
How to Hold the Camera
To minimize camera shake, hold the camera so that it will not move during
recording.
Hold the camera with both hands, keep your arms still at your side,
and stand with your feet shoulder width apart.
● Hold the camera firmly by wrapping your right hand around the camera
grip.
● Support the lens from below with your left hand.
• Do not block the flash, AF Assist Lamp, microphone, or speaker with your fingers
or other objects.
Microphone
AF Assist Lamp
Speaker
49
3. Basic Operations
Vertical Orientation Detection Function
This function detects when pictures were
recorded with the camera held vertically
orientated.
With the default settings, pictures are
automatically played back vertically
oriented. (368)
• When the camera is tilted significantly up or down, the vertical orientation
detection function may not work correctly.
• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be displayed vertically
orientated:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
50
3. Basic Operations
Taking Pictures
1
Adjust the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway
(press it gently).
● The aperture value and shutter
speed
are displayed.
(If the aperture value and shutter
speed are shown in red and
flashing, you do not have the
appropriate exposure, unless you
are using the flash.)
● Once the subject is in focus, the
focus indication
lights.
(When the subject is not in focus,
the indication blinks.)
2
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button fully (press
it further).
51
3. Basic Operations
• Recorded pictures can be displayed automatically by setting [Auto Review]
of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu. You can also change the picture
display duration to your preferred setting. (340)
• With the default settings, you cannot take a picture until the subject is
brought into focus.
If you set [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release
Shutter]) menu to [BALANCE] or [RELEASE], you will be able to take a
picture even when the subject is not in focus. (334)
Recording Videos
1
Start recording.
● Press the video rec. button.
• Release the video rec. button right after
you press it.
2
Stop recording.
● Press the video rec. button again.
52
3. Basic Operations
Selecting the Recording Mode
Rotate the mode dial.
Intelligent Auto mode (74)
Intelligent Auto Plus mode (77)
Program AE mode (91)
Aperture-Priority AE mode (93)
Shutter-Priority AE mode (96)
Manual Exposure mode (98)
Creative Video mode (244)
Slow & Quick mode (250)
Custom mode (303)
Scene Guide mode (105)
Creative Control mode (110)
53
3. Basic Operations
Camera Setting Operations
When changing the camera settings, operate the camera using the
following operation parts.
Front dial (53)
Control dial (53)
Cursor buttons (54)
[MENU/SET] button (54)
Touch screen (54)
Front Dial ( )/Control Dial ( )
Rotate:
Selects an item or numeric value.
54
3. Basic Operations
Cursor Buttons ( )
Press:
Selects an item or numeric value.
[MENU/SET] Button ( )
Press:
Confirms a setting.
Touch Screen
Operations can be performed by touching the icons, slide bars, menus,
and other items displayed on the screen.
Touch
Operation of touching and then lifting your
finger from the touch screen.
Drag
Operation of moving a finger while it
touches the touch screen.
Pinch (widen/narrow)
Operations of widening the distance
between two fingers (pinch out) and
narrowing the distance between two
fingers (pinch in) while they are touching
the touch screen.
• If you will use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, observe
the precautions for the sheet.
(Visibility and operability may be impaired depending on the type of monitor
protection sheet.)
• Touch operations can be disabled:
[
] [ ] [Touch Settings] (339)
55
3. Basic Operations
Display Settings
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter
Rotate the diopter adjustment
dial while looking through the
viewfinder.
• Adjust until you can clearly see the text on the
viewfinder.
56
3. Basic Operations
Switching Between the Monitor and Viewfinder
With the default settings, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching is set.
When you look through the viewfinder, the eye sensor
works and the
camera switches from monitor display to viewfinder display.
You can switch to viewfinder display or monitor display with [LVF]
.
Press [LVF].
Automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching
Viewfinder display Monitor display
57
3. Basic Operations
• If [LVF Display Speed] is set to [ECO 30fps] when the viewfinder is used,
the camera can be operated for a longer period since battery drainage is
reduced.
• In Self Shot Mode, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and
the [LVF] and eye sensor are disabled.
• The eye sensor may not work correctly due to the shape of eyeglasses, the
way the camera is held, or bright light shining around the eyepiece.
• During video playback or slide show, automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
does not work.
• To focus when looking through the viewfinder:
[
] [ ] [Eye Sensor AF] (332)
• The sensitivity of the eye sensor can be changed:
[
] [Eye Sensor] (356)
58
3. Basic Operations
Switching the Display Information
You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.
Press [DISP.].
● The display information is switched.
Recording Screen
Monitor
With information
Without
information
With information
+
level gauge
Without
information
+
level gauge
60
p
60
p
Turned off
(black)
Monitor recording
information
screen (63)
59
3. Basic Operations
Viewfinder
With information
Without
information
With information
+
level gauge
Without
information
+
level gauge
60
p
60
p
• You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method:
[
] [ ] [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (345)
Using the level gauge
The yellow line indicates the current angle. Correct the angle of the
camera so that it matches the white line.
Horizontal
Vertical
Green (no tilt)
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approx. ±1°.
• When the camera is tilted significantly upwards or downwards, the level
gauge may not be displayed correctly.
• You can adjust the level gauge and reset the adjusted values in [Level
Gauge Adjust.] in the [Setup] menu. (359)
60
3. Basic Operations
Playback Screen
With information
Detailed
information
display
*
1
Without
information
Display without
blinking
highlights
*
2
1/5
100-0001
2020.12.1 10:00
*
1
Pressing
switches the display information. (459)
*
2 This is a screen without blinking highlights display that is shown when [Highlight]
of the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) is set to [ON].
In other than this screen, overexposed parts of the screen will blink. (344)
61
3. Basic Operations
Quick Menu
This menu enables you to quickly set functions that are frequently used
during recording without calling up the menu screen. You can also change
the Quick menu display method and the items to display.
1
Display the Quick menu.
● Press [Q.MENU].
2
Select a menu item.
● Rotate .
● Selection is also possible by
touching a menu item.
60
p
3
Select a setting item.
● Rotate .
● Selection is also possible by
touching a setting item.
60
p
4
Close the Quick menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● You can also close the menu by
pressing [Q.MENU].
63
3. Basic Operations
Monitor recording information screen
This screen allows you to view the current recording settings on the
monitor.
• This screen is displayed only when [Monitor Info. Disp.] in the [Custom] ([Monitor /
Display]) menu is set to [ON].
1
Display the monitor recording
information screen.
● Press [DISP.] several times.
2
Touch the items.
● The setting screens for each of the
items are displayed.
3
Change the setting.
Example) Changing the AF Mode
● Touch the setting item.
• Refer to the pages explaining each item
for information on how to change the
settings.
(When [Set] is displayed on the monitor)
4
Touch [Set].
64
3. Basic Operations
Steps 2 to 4 can also be changed using
the following operations.
Press [Q.MENU].
Press (or rotate ) to select
an item.
Rotate to change the settings values.
• Some items cannot be set depending on the recording mode or camera
settings.
65
3. Basic Operations
Menu Operation Methods
In this camera, the menu is used for setting a wide variety of functions and
performing camera customizations.
Menu operations can be performed using the cursors, dial, or by touch.
1
Display the menu.
● Press .
2
Switch the menu type.
Press .
Press to select a tab such as
[
].
• You can also select the tab by rotating
or .
Press .
3
Select a menu item.
● Press to select a menu item
and then press
.
● You can also perform the same
operation by rotating
to select
the menu item and then pressing
.
66
3. Basic Operations
4
Select a setting item and then
confirm your selection.
● Press to select a setting item
and then press
.
● You can also perform the same
operation by rotating
to select
the setting item and then pressing
.
5
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● You can also close the menu by
pressing [
] several times.
• For details about menu items, refer to Menu Guide. (307)
Displaying Descriptions About Menu Items and Settings
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item
or setting item is selected, a description
about the item is displayed on the screen.
67
3. Basic Operations
Grayed Out Menu Items
Menu items that cannot be set are
displayed grayed out.
In some setting conditions, the reason the
setting is disabled is displayed when you
press
if you select a grayed-out item.
[Reset]
Return each of the following settings to the default setting:
– Recording settings
– Network settings (settings of [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth])
– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
– Setup/custom settings
(except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
[ ] Select [Reset]
• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also
reset:
– The [World Time] setting
– The [Travel Date] setting (Departure date, Return date, [Location])
– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in
the [Playback] menu
• Folder numbers and clock settings will not be reset.
68
3. Basic Operations
Recording Using Touch Functions
Touch AF/Touch Shutter
Touch functions allow you to focus on the point that you touch, release the
shutter, etc.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch the icon.
● The icon switches each time you
touch it.
Touch AF Focus on the Touched Position.
Touch Shutter Record with focus on the point touched.
OFF —
3
(When set to anything other
than OFF)
Touch the subject.
• When the Touch Shutter fails, the AF area first turns red and then
disappears.
• Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 132 for
information about operations to move the AF area.
• It is also possible to optimize the focus and brightness on the touched
position:
[
] [ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (142)
69
3. Basic Operations
Touch AE
This function adjusts the brightness according to a touched position.
When a subject’s face appears dark, you can make the screen brighter to
match the face.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Touch [ ].
● The Touch AE settings screen
appears.
3
Touch the subject to which you
wish to adjust the brightness.
• To return the position to which to adjust
the brightness to the center, touch
[Reset].
SetSet
ResetReset
4
Touch [Set].
How to Disable Touch AE
Touch [ ].
• When the following function is being used, Touch AE is not available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Digital Zoom]
– [4K Live Cropping]
• You can also adjust both the focus and brightness to those of the position
you touch. (At this time, Touch AE is not available):
[
] [ ] [Touch Settings] [Touch AF] [AF+AE] (142)
70
3. Basic Operations
Recording with the Tripod grip
It can be used as a grip for recording while walking. You can take pictures
or record video without operating the camera. It can also be used as a
tripod.
• Use the tripod grip supplied with the DC-G100V or the tripod grip (DMW-SHGR1:
optional).
• Insert the battery pack and a memory card into the camera before mounting
it to the tripod grip.
• Do not use any other tripod grips except the supplied one or a genuine
Panasonic tripod grip (DMW-SHGR1: optional).
• After usage, remove the tripod grip from the camera.
• Be careful not to get your finger or any other part of your body caught.
• The carrying capacity (total mass of the loading camera body, lens, battery,
and other attached accessories) is 1.2 kg (2.65 lb).
(When the carrying capacity is exceeded, it may cause injuries or damage.)
• Confirm that the tripod grip is securely attached to the camera before using
it.
• Do not carry the tripod grip only with the hand strap while the camera is
attached.
• Depending on the camera angle or the lens and accessories attached, it
may not balance and become unstable. Do not use it as a tripod when the
tripod grip is in an unstable state.
• Do not carry it holding only the legs while the tripod’s legs are open.
Attaching the Hand Strap
Hand strap eyelet
71
3. Basic Operations
Attaching the camera to a tripod grip
• Hold the camera and tripod grip tightly, and securely attach them so
that they do not drop.
• For removal, perform the steps backwards.
1
Set the Camera on/off switch to [OFF].
2
Loosen the camera stand.
● Turn the fastening knob in the direction of .
Camera stand
Fastening knob
3
Attach the camera to a tripod grip.
● Align the camera screw with the tripod mount
on the camera. Turn the camera stand in the
direction of
, and tighten it firmly.
4
Lock the camera stand.
● Adjust the orientation of the camera. Turn
the fastening knob in the direction of
, and
tighten it firmly.
• The camera stand can be tilted 40 degrees in any
direction.
5
Connect the camera with the
connection cable.
● Connect the connection cable
into the camera’s [USB/CHARGE]
socket.
• Check the direction of the terminals and
plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(Inserting at an angle can deform the
terminal and cause malfunction.)
72
3. Basic Operations
Using as a grip
To prevent dropping, be sure to attach the supplied strap and fit it to your
wrist.
1
Close the tripod grip’s legs, put
your wrist through the hand
strap and grip it.
● Slide adjuster , and secure the
hand strap onto your wrist.
● When adjusting the direction of
the camera, hold the camera with
your hand and loosen the fastening
knob to adjust the direction. After
adjusting, securely tighten the
fastening knob
2
Press the button and record.
Self-shooting style
If you attach the camera to the direction shown
and rotate the monitor, you can record in Self
Shot Mode. (83)
73
3. Basic Operations
Taking pictures
Focus on the subject.
• Press the shutter button halfway (press lightly).
Take a picture.
• Press the shutter button fully (push the button all the
way).
Recording video
Start recording.
• Press the video rec. button .
• Immediately release the video rec. button after pressing it.
End recording.
• Press the video rec. button again.
Sleep button ( )
Press: The camera will go into a sleep (power save) status.
• This is the same state as [Sleep Mode] under [Economy]. (37)
• When the camera is under a status where [Sleep Mode] does not work, the camera
will not enter sleep status.
• The camera can enter sleep status even when [Sleep Mode] is set to [OFF].
• To wake the camera up from sleep, press the shutter button halfway down.
Using as a tripod
1
Open the legs of the tripod grip.
2
Place it in a level and stable place.
● When adjusting the direction of the camera,
hold the camera with your hand and loosen
the fastening knob to adjust the direction. After
adjusting, securely tighten the fastening knob.
74
4. Recording mode
For information about the [ ] mode and [ ] mode, refer to pages
244 and 250, and for the [
] mode, refer to page 303.
Intelligent Auto Mode
In the [ ] mode (Intelligent Auto mode), the camera detects the scene to
set the optimal recording settings automatically to match the subject and
recording conditions.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
● In default settings, the mode is set
to Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
2
Aim the camera at the subject.
● When the camera detects the
scene, the recording mode icon
changes.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3
Adjust the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● Once the subject is in focus, the
focus indication lights.
(When the subject is not in focus,
the indication blinks.)
75
4. Recording mode
4
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button fully.
• Backlight compensation operates automatically to prevent subjects from
appearing dark when there is a backlight.
76
4. Recording mode
Types of Automatic Scene Detection
: Scenes detected during picture taking
: Scenes detected during video recording
:
[i-Portrait]
:
[i-Scenery]
:
[i-Macro]
:
[i-Night Portrait]
*
1
:
[i-Night Scenery]
:
[i-Handheld Night
Shot]
*
2
:
[i-Food]
:
[i-Baby]
*
3
:
[i-Sunset]
:
[i-Low Light]
:
[
]/[ ]
*
1 Displayed only when using flash.
*
2 Displayed only when [iHandheld Night Shot] is [ON].
*
3 Displayed when children (that are registered in the camera with Face
Recognition) under 3 years old are recognized.
• If none of the scenes are applicable, it is recorded with [ ]/[ ]
(standard setting).
• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON] and if the camera recognizes a face
similar to a registered face, [R] is displayed on the upper right corner of the
[
], [ ], and [ ] icons.
• Different scene types may be selected for the same subject depending on
the recording conditions.
77
4. Recording mode
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
[ ] allows you to adjust some settings such as the brightness and
color tone while also using [
] for other settings so that you can record
pictures more suited to your preferences.
( : Available, –: Not available)
Intelligent Auto Plus
Mode
Intelligent Auto Mode
Setting the color tone
–
Setting the brightness
(exposure)
–
Defocus control
function
–
Menus that can be set Many Few
[ ]/[ ] Select [Intelligent Auto Mode]
Settings: [
] (Intelligent Auto Mode)/
[
] (Intelligent Auto Plus Mode)
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
78
4. Recording mode
[AF Mode]
[AF Mode] is automatically set to [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]).
• If you touch the subject, the camera switches to [ ] ([Tracking]) and the AF
tracking function starts operating.
– The AF tracking function will also work if you press [
] ( ) and then press the
shutter button halfway.
• Each press of [
] ( ) changes the AF mode.
• For information about AF modes, refer to page 131 and 133.
Flash
When recording using a flash, the camera switches to the appropriate
flash mode for the recording conditions.
• When [ ] or [ ], Red-Eye Removal works.
• When Slow Sync. ([
], [ ]), be careful with regard to camera shake
because the shutter speed becomes slow.
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, you can set [Flash Mode] under [Flash] in the
[Rec] menu to [
] (Forced Flash Off) even when the flash is open.
79
4. Recording mode
[Intelligent Auto] menu
[iHandheld Night Shot]
If a night scene is detected automatically while the unit is being handheld,
[iHandheld Night Shot] can record a still picture with less jitter and less
noise without using a tripod by combining a burst of pictures.
[ ]/[ ] Select [iHandheld Night Shot]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• The flash is fixed to the [ ] (Forced Flash Off) setting.
[iHDR]
When there is, for example, a strong contrast between the background
and the subject, [iHDR] records multiple still pictures with differing
exposures and combines them to create a single still picture rich in
gradation.
[ ]/[ ] Select [iHDR]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• [iHDR] is activated when required. When activated, [ ] will be displayed on the
screen.
• Since a burst of still pictures are combined after they have been recorded, it will be
a few moments before you can record another picture.
• In the case of composition from a burst, afterimages may appear if the subject was
moving.
80
4. Recording mode
• The angle of view becomes slightly narrow.
• After the shutter button has been pressed, do not move the camera during
the burst operation.
• This function will not work for still pictures while video is being recorded.
• [iHDR] and [iHandheld Night Shot] are not available when using the
following functions:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Burst]
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Bracket]
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
• [iHDR] does not work when firing the flash.
81
4. Recording mode
Taking pictures with different color tones, degrees of
blurriness, and brightness
Setting coloring
Press [ ] ( ) to display the setting
screen.
Rotate or to adjust color.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
• The color setting will return to the default
level (center point) when this unit is turned
off or the camera is switched to another
Recording mode.
Setting brightness
Press [ ].
Rotate or to adjust brightness.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
82
4. Recording mode
Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)
Press [ ], and then press [Fn4].
8.05.64.0
250 125 60 30 15
Rotate or to adjust the
background defocusing condition.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
• AF Mode is set to [
].
The position of the AF area can be set by
touching the screen. (Its size cannot be
changed)
With touch screen operations
Touch [ ].
Touch the item you want to set.
[
]: Coloring
[
]: Degree of defocusing
[
]: Brightness
Drag the slide bar or exposure meter
to set.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens while
operating Defocus Control. This is due to the aperture operation of the lens
and is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may
be recorded during the recording of a video when the function is used.
• At the brightness setting screen you can assign the exposure bracket to
:
[
] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (337)
83
4. Recording mode
Self Shot Mode ([Self Shot])
You can easily take pictures of yourself while looking at the screen.
1
Rotate the monitor as shown in
the figure.
● A mirror image will be displayed on
the monitor.
● The touch operation is enabled.
● [Quick AF] is set to [ON]. (332)
2
Touch the item.
• For details, refer to page 84.
4K Selfie (87)
Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot])
(86)
3
Touch [Exit].
4
Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor.
● The AF area is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face/Eye
Detection function.
• The camera will automatically display a mark indicating the sound pickup
target around the AF area depending on the state of the subject. (266)
• If [
] in AF Mode is not available with the current Recording Mode, an
available focus setting for each Recording Mode will be used.
84
4. Recording mode
5
Take the picture.
● For information on how to start
taking a picture, refer to [Shutter]
(85)
• Regardless of the [Shutter] setting,
you can start recording by pressing the
shutter button or video rec. button.
• With the default setting, it will focus automatically after the countdown ends.
([AF After Countdown] (348))
Setting items
: Default settings
[Soft Skin]
OFF/1 to 10
Makes people’s faces look brighter and their skin tones
look softer.
[Filter Select]
[ ] (No effect), [ ] (Expressive), [ ] (Retro),
[
] (High key), [ ] (Monochrome),
[
] (Toy effect)
Add a filter effect appropriate to [Self Shot].
[Background
Control]
[ ] (Off), [ ] (Defocus), [ ] (Clear)
Changes the degree of defocusing for the background
of detected faces.
[Slimming Mode]
OFF/1 to 10
Makes people look slimmer.
85
4. Recording mode
[Shutter]
[
] (Shutter button only), [ ] (Touch),
[
] (Buddy), [ ] (Face)
Sets the way the shutter is released.
[
] (Shutter button only): Push the shutter button
to take pictures or the video rec. button to record video.
[
] (Touch): Focuses on the touched position before
taking a picture. (Records a video when in [
]/
[
] mode.)
[
] (Buddy): The shutter is released when two faces
detected move closer to each other.
• Even if several subjects are present, Face/Eye
Detection detects only a maximum of two faces.
[ ] (Face): The shutter is released when a face is
covered with a hand or other object and then detected
again.
[Countdown]/
[Shots]
OFF/1 to 10 (
3)
Set the number of seconds before recording
([Countdown]).
[ ] (1 pic.), [ ] (2 pic.), [ ] (3 pic.),
[
] (4 pic.)
Set the number of consecutive shots ([Shots]).
86
4. Recording mode
Recording self-shot videos with automatically adjusted
settings
The camera records people well-lit and with clear backgrounds by
automatically focusing on them. This is good for recording self-shot videos
to upload to social media.
Set the mode dial to one of the following.
• [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode
• [
] mode (Set [Exposure Mode] to [P])
• [
] mode (Set [S&Q Exposure Mode] to [P])
• You can record videos in recording modes other than the above, but it will
not be set as self-shot videos with automatically adjusted settings.
Built-in microphone setting ([Self Shot])
You can set the sound pickup range when using the built-in microphone
by touching an icon on the screen.
1
Touch [ ].
87
4. Recording mode
2
Select and touch the sound
pickup range.
Settings: [AUTO]/[SURROUND]/
[FRONT]/[TRACKING]/
[BACK]
• For details, refer to page 265.
• This does not work with [Built-in Mic] of the video menu.
4K Selfie
You can switch to 4K Photo Mode and take pictures of yourself.
1
Touch [ ].
2
Select and touch the recording
method.
• In Self Shot Mode, you can take pictures
with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)], a setting
that allows you to include a wider
background.
(In modes other than Self Shot Mode, the
setting will switch to [4K Burst].)
88
4. Recording mode
[4K Burst (Wide-
angle)]
A 4K Photo Mode for taking selfies with an angle of
view wider than that of [4K Burst]
Burst speed: 15 pictures/second
Audio recording: Not available
• For information about other types of 4K Photo Mode and the recording
methods for 4K Photo Mode, etc., refer to (164)
3
Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor.
(When [4K Burst (Wide-angle)] is selected)
Press the shutter button halfway.
Press and hold the shutter button
fully for as long as you want to
perform recording.
Press and hold
Recording is performed
• Recording will start approximately
0.5 seconds after you press the
shutter button fully. Therefore, press
the button fully slightly in advance.
• [Continuous AF] does not work during
recording. The focus is fixed in the first
picture.
• If you stop recording burst pictures
too soon, the camera may continue
recording until a certain time.
• When recording 4K photos, the angle of view becomes narrower. (Except
when recording with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)])
• For 4K photo recording, only [Filter Select] can be set.
89
4. Recording mode
• If you set [Self Shot] to [OFF], the mode will not switch to Self Shot Mode
even if you rotate the monitor. (348)
• Be careful not to look at the light from the flash and the AF Assist Lamp
directly.
• When the [Soft Skin] is set
– If you set the strength of the effect to [2] or greater, the recording screen
display will be more delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also,
when you record, it will require some time to process the image before
the next shot.
– The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar tone to the
complexion of a subject, as well.
– This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting.
• When [Background Control] is set to [
] (Defocus), the recording screen
display will be more delayed than normal like a frame dropping. Also, when
you record, it will require some time to process the image before the next
shot.
• If the lighting is insufficient when [Background Control] is set to [
]
(Clear), you may not be able to take pictures as desired.
• When the following functions are being used, Self Shot Mode is not
available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [Live View Composite]
• [Soft Skin] and a [
] (Defocus) setting of [Background Control] are not
available when using the following functions:
– Video recording
– [Glistening Water], [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing
Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld
Night Shot], [Soft Image of a Flower], [Appetizing Food], [Cute Dessert]
([
] mode)
– [
] mode
– Manual Focus
90
4. Recording mode
• When the following functions are being used, a [Background Control] setting
of [
] (Clear) is not available:
– Video recording
– Any mode for [
] mode other than [Silky Skin]/[Monochrome]
– [
] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode
• When [Filter Settings] in the [Rec] / [Motion Picture] menu is not available,
[Filter Select] in the Self Shot Mode is also unavailable.
• When recording video, [Slimming Mode] and [Shots] cannot be used.
• [
] (Buddy) and [ ] (Face) are not available when using the following
functions:
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– Recording Modes which do not allow setting to [
] of AF Mode (130)
– Manual Focus
91
4. Recording mode
Program AE Mode
In [ ] mode (Program AE mode), the camera automatically sets the
shutter speed and aperture value for the brightness of the subject.
You can also use Program Shift to change combinations of shutter speed
and aperture values while keeping the same exposure.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press the shutter button
halfway.
● This displays the aperture value
and shutter speed value
on the
recording screen.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved,
the aperture value and shutter speed
blink red.
3
Start recording.
92
4. Recording mode
Program Shift
You can change the shutter speed and aperture value combination set
automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure.
With this, you can, for example, make the background more defocused
by decreasing the aperture value or capture a moving subject more
dynamically by slowing the shutter speed.
Press the shutter button halfway.
• This displays the aperture value and shutter speed value on the recording
screen. (Approx. 10 seconds)
Rotate or while the values are
displayed.
• This displays the Program Shift icon on
the recording screen.
Start recording.
Canceling Program Shift
– Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
– Rotate
or until the Program Shift icon disappears.
• Program Shift is not available when using the following functions:
– Flash
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
] (ISO sensitivity)
• You can customize dial operations:
[
] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Rotation (F/SS)] (338)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[
] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (345)
93
4. Recording mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
In [ ] mode (Aperture-Priority AE mode), you can set the aperture value
before recording.
The shutter speed will be automatically set by the camera.
Smaller aperture values
It becomes easier to defocus the
background.
Larger aperture values
It becomes easier to bring everything
into focus including the background.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
94
4. Recording mode
2
Set the aperture value.
● Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
Depth of Field Characteristics
Aperture value Small Large
Focal length of lens Telephoto Wide-angle
Distance to subject Near More distant
Depth of field
(area in sharp focus)
Shallow (narrow)
Example: When you want
to take an image with a
defocused background.
Deep (wide)
Example: When you
want to take an image
with focus as far as the
background.
95
4. Recording mode
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (104)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring
to other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
• You can customize dial operations:
[
] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (338)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[
] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (345)
96
4. Recording mode
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
In [ ] mode (Shutter-Priority AE mode), you can set the shutter speed
before recording.
The aperture value will be automatically set by the camera.
Slower shutter speeds
It becomes easier to capture motion
Faster shutter speeds
It becomes easier to freeze motion
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
97
4. Recording mode
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Rotate or .
3
Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (104)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire
the flash. (230)
• You can customize dial operations:
[
] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (338)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[
] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (345)
98
4. Recording mode
Manual Exposure Mode
In [ ] mode (Manual Exposure mode), you can take pictures by manually
setting the aperture value and shutter speed.
In default settings, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
As a result, the ISO sensitivity will be adjusted according to the aperture
value and shutter speed.
Exposure compensation can also be used when ISO sensitivity is set to
[AUTO].
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value and
shutter speed.
● Rotate to set the aperture value,
and
to set the shutter speed.
Aperture value
Shutter speed
3
Start recording.
• If the correct exposure is not achieved
when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, the aperture value and the
shutter speed blink red.
99
4. Recording mode
Available Shutter Speeds (Sec.)
[EFC] [T] (Time, max. approx. 60 seconds), 60 to 1/500
[ESHTR] 1 to 1/16000
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on
the recording screen.
To check the effects on the recording screen, use [Preview]. (104)
You can set the preview mode to operate constantly in [
] mode.
[
] [ ] [Constant Preview] (341)
• The brightness of the recording screen and of actual recorded images may
differ.
Check the images on the playback screen.
• When using a lens with an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring
to other than [A] to use the aperture value of the lens.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire
the flash. (230)
• You can customize dial operations:
[
] [ ] [Dial Set.] [Assign Dial (F/SS)]/[Rotation (F/SS)] (338)
• The recording screen can display an exposure meter indicating the
relationship between aperture value and shutter speed:
[
] [ ] [Expo.Meter] (345)
Manual Exposure Assist
When ISO sensitivity is set to other than [AUTO], Manual Exposure Assist
(Example:
) will be displayed on the recording screen.
You can check the difference between the current exposure value and the
correct exposure (±0) measured by the camera.
• Use Manual Exposure Assist as a guide.
We recommend checking the images on the playback screen when recording.
100
4. Recording mode
[T] (Time)
If you set the shutter speed to [T], the shutter stays open when the shutter
button is pressed fully. (up to approx. 60 seconds)
The shutter closes if you press the shutter button again.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to record
images of fireworks, night scenery or a starry sky.
• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control function (389)
during time recording.
• Time recording may create noticeable noise.
If you are concerned about noise, we recommend that you set [Long Shtr
NR] (320) to [ON] in the [Rec] menu before recording.
• Time is not available when using the following functions:
– When recording using the flash (When [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– [Bracket]
– [HDR]
– [Silent Mode]
– Electronic shutter
101
4. Recording mode
Live View Composite Recording
The camera records images at set exposure time intervals, and combines
parts with changes in bright light to save the result as one picture.
• You can check a combined image at each exposure time interval.
• This function is useful for capturing the light trails of stars and fireworks with bright
night scenery in the background.
• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Start Live View Composite
Recording.
● [ ] [Live View Composite]
[Start]
3
Set the exposure time per frame (shutter speed) and ISO
sensitivity.
● Rotate to set the shutter speed. (1/2 second to 60 seconds)
● Press and rotate to set the ISO sensitivity.
4
Obtain an image with reduced
noise.
● Press the shutter button fully.
• A countdown screen is displayed. Wait
until this step completes.
102
4. Recording mode
5
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button fully.
• Images are combined every time the exposure time set in step 3 has passed.
Histogram display.
5 sec. × 1200
1h40m00s
Exposure time per frame × Number of
pictures combined.
Elapsed time.
• The time is updated with each
increase in the number of pictures
combined.
6
Stop recording.
● Press the shutter button fully again.
• This will run noise reduction and save the image.
• Live View Composite can record up to 3 hours per recording.
(Recording stops automatically when the recording time exceeds 3 hours.)
[Shutter Delay]
If you want to reduce the jitter that occurs at the start of recording due to
pressing the shutter button, you can set [Shutter Delay] in Step
2. The
shutter will be released when the set time elapses after you press the
shutter button.
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
How to cancel Live View Composite Recording
On the recording screen, press [Fn2].
103
4. Recording mode
• [Long Shtr NR] is fixed to [ON].
• The flash will only fire on the first frame.
• After an image for noise reduction is obtained, some menus are not
displayed.
• The image for noise reduction will be discarded if the following operations
are performed. Follow step
4 again.
– Select [Start] with [Live View Composite].
– Changing the shutter speed
– Changing the ISO sensitivity
– Switching to Playback Mode
• When the shutter button is pressed fully to stop recording, the last image will
not be included in the combined image.
• When the following functions are being used, [Live View Composite] is not
available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Filter Settings]
– [Silent Mode]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [HDR]
– [Multi Exp.]
– Electronic shutter
104
4. Recording mode
Preview Mode
You can check the effects of aperture on the recording screen by
physically closing the aperture blades of the lens to the aperture value set
for actual recording.
In addition to the effects of aperture, you can check the effects of shutter
speed at the same time.
• Use the Fn button registered with [Preview] to operate. In default settings, this is
registered in the [Fn6].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 292.
Press [Fn6].
• Each press of the button switches between the
effect preview screens.
Aperture effect: OFF
Shutter speed effect:
OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect:
OFF
Aperture effect: ON
Shutter speed effect:
ON
• It is possible to record in preview mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000 of a second.
• Preview mode is not available when recording with [4K Pre-Burst].
105
4. Recording mode
Scene Guide Mode
If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with
reference to the example images, the camera will set optimal exposure,
color, and focus, allowing you to record in a manner appropriate to the
scene.
1
Set mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the scene.
● Press to select the scene and
press
.
• Selection is also possible by rotating
or
.
• The scene can also be selected by
touching an example image.
● Press [DISP.] to switch the screen
in the order of normal display, guide
display, and list display.
The guide display shows the
description of each scene.
106
4. Recording mode
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
• Depending on the scene, the recording screen may seem as if frames are
missed.
• To change the scene, select [Scene Switch] in the [Scene Guide] menu, and
then press
. You can return to step 2.
• Some of the recording menu items cannot be set because the camera
automatically adjusts the settings to the optimal values.
• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scenes,
you can fine tune the White Balance or use White Balance bracketing by
pressing [
] ( ) on the recording screen.
107
4. Recording mode
Types of Scene Guide Mode
1: [Clear Portrait]
Setting [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode]
You can apply the same [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode] settings as
those specified for Self Shot Mode.
Touch [ ] and select the setting item.
[Soft Skin]
Makes people’s faces
look brighter and their
skin tones look softer.
[Slimming
Mode]
Makes people look
slimmer.
Touch the slide bar.
• You can set it to “Off” or a value in the range
[1] to [10]. If you select the left edge of the
slide bar
, it will be set to “Off”.
ExitExit
Touch [Exit]
• If you change AF Mode to a setting other than [
] (Face/
Eye Detection), [Soft Skin] and [Slimming Mode] will become
unavailable.
2: [Silky Skin]
• If a part of the
background etc. is
a color close to skin
color, this part is also
smoothed.
• This mode may not be
effective when there is
insufficient brightness.
3: [Backlit Softness]
108
4. Recording mode
4: [Relaxing Tone] 5: [Sweet Child’s Face]
• When you touch the
face, a still picture is
recorded with the focus
and exposure set for
the touched location
6: [Distinct Scenery] 7: [Bright Blue Sky]
8: [Romantic Sunset
Glow]
9: [Vivid Sunset Glow]
10: [Glistening Water]
• Star filter used in this
mode may cause
glistening effects on the
objects other than water
surface.
11: [Clear Nightscape]
12: [Cool Night Sky] 13: [Warm Glowing
Nightscape]
14: [Artistic Nightscape] 15: [Glittering
Illuminations]
109
4. Recording mode
16: [Handheld Night
Shot]
• After the shutter button
has been pressed, do
not move the camera
during the burst
operation.
• The angle of view
becomes narrow
slightly.
17: [Clear Night Portrait]
• Tripod, self-timer
recommended.
• When [Clear Night
Portrait] is selected,
keep the subject still for
about 1 second after
taking the picture.
18: [Soft Image of a
Flower]
• For close-up recording,
we recommend that you
avoid using the flash.
19: [Appetizing Food]
• For close-up recording,
we recommend that you
avoid using the flash.
20: [Cute Dessert]
• For close-up recording,
we recommend that you
avoid using the flash.
21: [Freeze Animal
Motion]
• Default [AF Assist
Lamp] setting is [OFF].
22: [Clear Sports Shot] 23: [Monochrome]
110
4. Recording mode
Creative Control Mode
You can select the effects to be applied from sample pictures and preview
these effects on the screen.
1
Set mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the filter effect.
● Press to select the filter effect
and press
.
• Selection is also possible by rotating
or
.
• The filter effect can also be selected by
touching an example image.
Preview display
● Press [DISP.] to switch the screen
in the order of normal display, guide
display, and list display.
The guide display shows the
description of each filter.
1/8
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
• Depending on the filter effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames
are missed.
• [White Balance] will be fixed to [AWB] and ISO sensitivity to [AUTO].
111
4. Recording mode
Creative Control Menu
Select [ ]
[Filter Effect]
Allows you to display the selection screen of
filter effect.
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
Allows you to set the camera to take a picture
with and without a filter effect simultaneously.
Types and adjustments of filter effects
1
On the recording screen, press
[
] ( ).
2
Rotate or to set.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return
to the recording screen.
• When the filter effect is adjusted, the filter
icon on the recording screen is indicated
with [+].
112
4. Recording mode
Picture effect Items that can be set
[Expressive] Vividness
[Retro] Coloring
[Old Days] Contrast
[High Key] Coloring
[Low Key] Coloring
[Sepia] Contrast
[Monochrome] Coloring
[Dynamic Monochrome] Contrast
[Rough Monochrome] Grainy picture effect
[Silky Monochrome] Degree of defocusing
[Impressive Art] Vividness
[High Dynamic] Vividness
[Cross Process] Coloring
[Toy Effect] Coloring
[Toy Pop] Range in which peripheral brightness is reduced
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast
[Miniature Effect] Vividness
[Soft Focus] Degree of defocusing
[Fantasy] Vividness
[Star Filter]
Rays of light is short/Rays of light is long
Smaller/Larger
Rotate to the left/Rotate to the right
[One Point Color] Amount of color retained
[Sunshine] Coloring
113
4. Recording mode
Setting the Type of Defocus ([Miniature Effect])
Set Filter effect to [Miniature Effect].
Touch [ ], and then [ ].
Press or to move the in-focus
portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by
touching the screen.
• You can also switch the defocus orientation
by touching [
].
Rotate or to change the size of
in-focus portion.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the
screen.
• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].
Press to set.
• No audio is recorded in videos.
• The length of the video recorded will be approx. 1/10 of the actual recording
time. The displayed video recording time will be approx. 10 times longer
than the recording time displayed during normal video recording.
• If you end video recording after a short time, the camera may go on
recording for a certain period.
114
4. Recording mode
Setting the Color to Be Left ([One Point Color])
Set Filter effect to [One Point Color].
Touch [ ], and then [ ].
Press to move the frame and
select the color you want to leave.
• You can also select the color you want to
leave by touching the screen.
• To return the frame back to the center,
press [DISP.].
Press to set.
Setting the Light Source Position and Size ([Sunshine])
Set Filter effect to [Sunshine].
Touch [ ], and then [ ].
Press to move the center
position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be
moved by touching the screen.
Rotate or to adjust the size of the
light source.
• This can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in the screen.
• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].
Press .
115
4. Recording mode
Taking pictures with different degrees of blurriness
and brightness
Brightness
Press [ ].
Rotate or to adjust brightness.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
Defocusing the background (Defocus control function)
Press [ ], and then [Fn4].
8.05.64.0
250 125 60 30 15
Rotate or to adjust the
background defocusing condition.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
116
4. Recording mode
With touch screen operations
Touch [ ].
Touch the item you want to set.
[
]: Adjusting the filter effect
[
]: Degree of defocusing
[
]: Brightness
Drag the slide bar or exposure meter
to set.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to
the recording screen.
• Defocus control operation is not available in [Miniature Effect] ([ ] mode).
• At the brightness setting screen you can assign the exposure bracket to
:
[
] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (337)
117
5. Image Recording
[Aspect Ratio]
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[ ] Select [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] Aspect ratio of a 4:3 monitor
[3:2] Aspect ratio of a standard film camera
[16:9] Aspect ratio of a 16:9 TV
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
• When the following function is being used, [Aspect Ratio] is not available:
– [Multi Exp.]
118
5. Image Recording
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture’s image size.
[ ] Select [Picture Size]
[Aspect Ratio] 4:3 3:2 16:9 1:1
[Picture Size]
[L] 20M
5184×3888
[L] 17M
5184×3456
[L] 14.5M
5184×2920
[L] 14.5M
3888×3888
[M] 10M
3712×2784
[M] 9M
3712×2480
[M] 8M
3840×2160
[M] 7.5M
2784×2784
[S] 5M
2624×1968
[S] 4.5M
2624×1752
[S] 2M
1920×1080
[S] 3.5M
1968×1968
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is set, the [M] and [S] picture sizes are indicated with
[
].
• When the following functions are being used, [Picture Size] is not available:
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
] ([Quality])
– [Multi Exp.]
119
5. Image Recording
[Quality]
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[ ] Select [Quality]
Setting File format Settings details
JPEG
JPEG images that give priority to image quality.
JPEG images of standard image quality.
This is useful for increasing the number of
recordable pictures without changing the picture
size.
RAW+JPEG
This records RAW and JPEG images ([
] or [ ])
simultaneously.
RAW This records RAW images.
120
5. Image Recording
Note on RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed
on the camera.
Playback and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated
software.
• You can process RAW images on the camera. (286)
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to
process and edit RAW files on a PC. (442)
• Pictures taken with [
] cannot be displayed enlarged to the maximum
magnification during playback.
Take pictures with [
] or [ ] if you want to check their focus on the
camera after recording.
• RAW images are always recorded in the [L] size of the [4:3] aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [
] or [ ] on the camera,
both the RAW and JPEG images will be deleted simultaneously.
• [
], [ ] and [ ] are not available when using the following function:
– [
] mode ([Handheld Night Shot])
• When the following functions are being used, [Quality] is not available:
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Multi Exp.]
121
5. Image Recording
[Folder / File Settings]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
Folder name File name
100ABCDE
PABC0001.JPG
Folder number (3 digits, 100 to 999)
Color space
([P]: sRGB, [ _ ]: AdobeRGB)
5-character user-defined segment 3-character user-defined segment
File number (4 digits, 0001 to 9999)
Extension
[ ] Select [Folder / File Settings]
[Select Folder] Selects a folder for storing images.
[Create a New
Folder]
Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for
resetting the folder number is displayed.
[OK]
Increments the folder number without changing the
5-character user-defined segment (
above).
[Change]
Changes the 5-character user-defined segment (
above). This will also increment the folder number.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder
Number
Link]
Uses the 3-character user-defined segment (
above) to set the folder number (
above).
[User
Setting]
Changes the 3-character user-defined segment
(
above).
• Available characters: alphabetic characters (upper-case), numerals, [ _ ] (refer to
“Entering Characters” (370))
122
5. Image Recording
• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of
recording.
If you change the storage folder, a number continuing on from the last file
number will be assigned.
• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will
be created automatically when the next file is saved:
– The number of files in the current folder reaches 1000.
– The file number reaches 9999.
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100
all the way up to 999.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
123
5. Image Recording
[No.Reset]
Refresh the folder number to reset the file number to 0001.
[ ] Select [No.Reset]
• When the folder number reaches 999, the number cannot be reset.
We recommend backing up your data and formatting the card.
• To reset the folder number to 100:
Perform [Format] to format the card. (40)
Perform [No.Reset] to reset the file number.
Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
124
6. Focus/Zoom
Selecting the Focus Mode
Select the focusing method (focus mode) to match subject movement.
Set the Focus Mode.
● [ ]/[ ] [Focus Mode]
[AFS]
This is suitable for recording still subjects.
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera focuses
once.
The focus stays locked while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[AFF]
*
1
This is suitable for recording subjects with movements that cannot
be predicted.
If the subject moves while the shutter button is pressed halfway, the
focus is readjusted automatically according to the movement of the
subject.
[AFC]
*
1
This is suitable for recording moving subjects.
While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the focus is constantly
adjusted according to the movement of the subject.
[MF]
Manual focusing. Use this when you want to fix the focus or avoid
activating AF. (146)
*
1 This predicts the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing. (Movement
prediction)
125
6. Focus/Zoom
• In the following cases, [AFF] or [AFC] works the same as [AFS] when the
shutter button is pressed halfway:
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– [4K Burst(S/S)]
– In low light situations
• [AFF] is not available when recording 4K photos. Continuous AF works
during recording.
• This function is not available for Post-Focus recording.
126
6. Focus/Zoom
Using AF
AF (Auto Focus) refers to automatic focusing.
Select the focus mode and the AF mode appropriate for the subject and
scene.
1
Set the Focus Mode. (124)
● [ ]/[ ] [Focus Mode] [AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]
2
Select AF mode.
● Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF
mode selection screen, and set
using
. (129)
• In [ ]/[ ] mode, each press of [ ]
(
) switches between [ ] and [ ].
(78)
3
Press the shutter button
halfway.
● The AF operates.
Focus display
AF area
Focus
In focus Not in focus
Focus display Lights Blinking
AF area Green —
AF beep Two beeps —
127
6. Focus/Zoom
Low illumination AF
• In dark environments, low illumination AF automatically operates, and the focus
display is indicated as [
].
• Achieving focus may take more time than usual.
Starlight AF
• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after determining low illumination AF,
then Starlight AF will be activated.
When focus is achieved, the focus display will display [
], and the AF area will be
displayed on the area in focus.
• Edges of the screen cannot detect Starlight AF.
Subjects and recording conditions that make focusing difficult with AF
mode
– Fast-moving subjects
– Extremely bright subjects
– Subjects without contrast
– Subjects recorded through windows
– Subjects near shiny objects
– Subjects in very dark locations
– When recording subjects both distant and near
• When the following operations are performed while recording with [AFF] or
[AFC], it may take some time for the camera to focus.
– When zooming from the wide-angle end to the telephoto end
– When the subject is suddenly changed from one far away to one close by
• If using the zoom after achieving focus, the focus may be erroneous. In that
case, re-adjust the focus.
• You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter button halfway:
[
] [ ] [Half Press Release] (331)
• When camera shake reduces, it is possible to focus automatically:
[
] [ ] [Quick AF] (332)
128
6. Focus/Zoom
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of subjects.
1
Set the focus mode to [AFF] or [AFC]. (124)
2
Set [AF Sensitivity(Photo)].
● [ ] [AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
+
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera re-adjusts
the focus immediately. You can bring different subjects into focus one after
another.
–
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the camera waits for a
short period of time before re-adjusting the focus. This allows you to prevent
the focus from being accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object
moves across the image.
• When the following functions are being used, [AF Sensitivity(Photo)] is not
available:
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
129
6. Focus/Zoom
Selecting the AF Mode
Select the focusing method to match the position and number of subjects.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Select the AF mode.
● Press to select an item and
then press
.
● Selection is also possible by
rotating
or .
[Face/Eye Detection]
131
[Tracking]
133
[49-Area]
135
etc.
Custom Multi
136
138
[1-Area]
139
[Pinpoint]
140
130
6. Focus/Zoom
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic
Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Appetizing
Food], [Cute Dessert] ([
] mode)
• When the following functions are being used, [
] is not available:
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Live View Composite]
• When the focus mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC], [
] is not available.
• When the following function is being used, the AF mode is fixed to [
]
([Face/Eye Detection]):
– Self Shot Mode (If [
] in AF Mode is not available with the current
Recording Mode, an available focus setting for each Recording Mode will
be used.)
– [4K Live Cropping]
• When the following functions are being used, the AF mode is fixed to [
]:
– [Digital Zoom]
– [Miniature Effect] ([
] mode)
• When the following functions are being used, [AF Mode] is not available:
– [Post Focus]
– [Pull Focus] ([Snap Movie])
• When [Digital Zoom] is set, it is not possible to move the AF area or change
its size.
131
6. Focus/Zoom
[Face/Eye Detection]
The camera automatically detects the faces and eyes of subjects.
When the camera detects a person’s face
/ , an AF area is displayed.
Yellow
AF area to be brought into
focus. The camera selects this
automatically.
White
Displayed when multiple subjects
are detected.
• Eye detection works only for the eyes inside
the yellow frame
.
Specify the Eye to Bring into Focus
Touch the eye to be used for focusing.
• To cancel the settings specified, touch
[
].
• The eye to be in focus cannot be changed when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• When a person’s eyes are detected, the eye closer to the camera will be
brought into focus.
The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is set to
[
])
• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
• If any humans are not detected, the camera operates as [
].
• During recording, you can make the sound pickup range of the built-in mic
work with the face/eye detection function:
[
] [Built-in Mic] (265)
132
6. Focus/Zoom
Move and Change the Size of the Yellow AF Area
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select [ ] and then press .
Press to move the position of
the AF area.
Rotate or to change the size of
the AF area.
Press .
• On the recording screen, press , or
touch [
] to cancel the AF area setting.
Operations on the AF area movement screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Touch Moves the AF area.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the AF area.
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns the AF area position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the AF area size to the
default setting.
133
6. Focus/Zoom
[Tracking]
The AF area follows the movement of the subject, maintaining focusing.
Start tracking.
● Aim the AF area over the subject, and
press the shutter button halfway.
• When the subject is recognized, the AF
tracking area turns green. When you release
the shutter button, the AF tracking area turns
yellow and the subject is automatically kept
in focus.
• The same operation can be performed by
touching the subject.
• To release AF Tracking
→Touch [
] or press .
• If tracking fails, the AF area blinks red.
• Set [Metering Mode] to [ ] to continue to adjust the exposure as well.
• In the following, [
] operates as [ ]:
– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower],
[Monochrome] ([
] mode)
– [Sepia], [Monochrome], [Dynamic Monochrome], [Rough Monochrome],
[Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], [L.Monochrome D] ([Photo Style])
– When the subject is small
134
6. Focus/Zoom
Move the Position of the AF Area
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select [ ] and then press .
Press to move the position of the AF area.
• You can also move the AF area by touching.
• To return the position back to the center, press [DISP.].
Press .
135
6. Focus/Zoom
[49-Area]
The camera selects the most optimal AF
area to focus from 49 areas.
When multiple AF areas are selected, all
selected AF areas will be brought into
focus.
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
You can set the focus position by selecting an
AF area group. The AF area, which is configured
with 49 points, is divided into groups consisting of
9 points each (6 points or 4 points for the groups
located at the edges of the screen).
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection
screen.
Select [ ] and press .
Press to select an AF area group.
• You can also move the AF area by touching.
• To return the AF area position to the center, press
[DISP.].
Press .
• Setting of the AF area is cleared when is pressed
or [
] is touched.
Examples of
group
• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:
[
] [ ] [AF Area Display] (335)
136
6. Focus/Zoom
/ /
Custom Multi (Horizontal, Vertical,
Center)
[Horizontal Pattern]
Ideal shape for panning, etc.
[Vertical Pattern]
Ideal shape for recording structures, etc.
[Central Pattern]
Within the 49 AF areas, a central oval
zone can be focused.
137
6. Focus/Zoom
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press .
Select [ ], [ ] or [ ] and then
press
.
Press to move the position of
the AF area.
• You can also move the AF area by
touching.
Rotate or to change the size of the AF area.
• You can also pinch out/pinch in the AF area to change the size.
• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF area position to the center.
The second press returns the size of the AF area to the default.
Press .
Registering the set AF area in [
], [ ] and [ ] (Custom)
1
Press on the screen of step .
2
Use to select the registration target icon and press .
• The settings adjusted in [ ], [ ] or [ ] will be restored to the default
settings when the camera is turned off.
• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:
[
] [ ] [AF Area Display] (335)
138
6. Focus/Zoom
Custom Multi (C1 to C3)
The shape of the AF area can be set freely in the 49 AF areas.
The set AF area can be registered using [
] to [ ].
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ] etc.), and press .
Select one of [ ] to [ ] and then
press
.
Select the AF area.
● Touch operation
Touch the area to make the AF area.
• To select consecutive points, drag the
screen.
• To cancel selection of the selected AF
area, touch it again.
● Button operation
Press
to select the AF area and then set with .
(Repeat this)
• To cancel selection of the selected AF area, press again.
• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].
Press [Fn4].
• The display method for the AF area using 49-area focusing can be changed:
[
] [ ] [AF Area Display] (335)
139
6. Focus/Zoom
[1-Area]
Specify the point to be brought into focus.
Move and Change the Size of the AF Area
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select [ ] and then press .
Press to move the position of
the AF area.
Rotate or to change the size of
the AF area.
Press .
• Refer to “Operations on the AF area movement screen” on page 132 for
information about detailed operations to move the AF area.
140
6. Focus/Zoom
[Pinpoint]
You can achieve a more precise focus on
a small point.
If you press the shutter button halfway, the
screen that lets you check the focus will
be enlarged.
Move the Position of the AF Area
Press [ ] ( ) to display the AF mode selection screen.
Select [ ] and then press .
Press to set the position of [+] and then press .
• The selected position on the screen will be enlarged.
• The AF area cannot be moved to the edge of the screen.
Press to fine-adjust the
position of [+].
Press .
141
6. Focus/Zoom
Operations on the Magnification Window
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Touch Moves [+].
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode).
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: Returns to the screen in Step
.
Second time: Returns the AF area position to
the center.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3x to 6x; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3x to 10x.
• You can also take a picture by touching [
].
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] switches to [ ]:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO]
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[
] [ ] [Pinpoint AF Setting] (332)
142
6. Focus/Zoom
Moving the AF Area by Touch
You can move the AF area to a touched position on the monitor.
Optimizing the focus and brightness to the touched
position
Set [Touch AF].
● [ ] [ ] [Touch Settings]
[Touch AF]
[AF]
This focuses on the touched
subject.
[AF+AE]
This focuses on and adjusts
brightness for the touched subject.
• The default setting is [AF].
Focus on the Touched Position ([AF])
Touch the subject.
• The AF area moves to the touched position.
Size of the AF area can be set when AF Mode is in the following cases:
– [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]), [ ] ([1-Area]), [ ] ([Pinpoint])
– [
] etc. ([Vertical Pattern], [Horizontal Pattern] or [Central Pattern] of Custom
Multi)
Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center.
The second touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
• With [
], operations will be on a magnified screen. (141)
Touch [Set].
• In [ ], touch [Exit].
143
6. Focus/Zoom
Focus on and Adjust Brightness for the Touched Position
([AF+AE])
Touch the subject to which you wish to
adjust the brightness.
• At the touched position, an AF area
that works in the same way as [
] is
displayed.
This places a point to adjust brightness at
the center of the AF area.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [
], which is
used exclusively for the [Touch AE].
ResetReset
SetSet
Pinch out/pinch in to change the AF area size.
• The first touch of [Reset] returns the AF area position to the center. The second
touch returns the size of the AF area to the default.
Touch [Set].
• The [AF+AE] area setting is canceled if you touch [ ] (when [ ] is set:
[
]) on the recording screen.
• When the following functions are being used, [AF+AE] is not available:
– [Digital Zoom]
– [4K Live Cropping]
144
6. Focus/Zoom
Moving the AF Area during Viewfinder Display
During viewfinder display, you can touch the monitor to change the
position and size of the AF area.
1
Set [Touch Pad AF].
● [ ] [ ]
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]/
[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]
2
Move the position of the AF
area.
● During viewfinder display, touch the
monitor.
3
Change the size of the AF area.
● Rotate or .
• The first press of [DISP.] returns the AF
area position to the center. The second
press returns the size of the AF area to
the default.
4
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
145
6. Focus/Zoom
Setting Items ([Touch Pad AF])
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area
of the viewfinder by
touching a desired
position on the touch
pad.
[OFFSET1]
to
[OFFSET7]
Moves the AF area
of the viewfinder
according to the
distance you drag
your finger on the
touch pad.
Select the range to be detected with the drag operation.
[OFFSET1] (entire area)/[OFFSET2] (right half)/
[OFFSET3] (upper right)/[OFFSET4] (lower right)/
[OFFSET5] (left half)/[OFFSET6] (upper left)/
[OFFSET7] (lower left)
[OFF] —
• When the following functions are being used, [Touch Pad AF] is not
available.
– [4K Live Cropping]
– [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie]
146
6. Focus/Zoom
Record Using Manual Focus
MF (Manual Focus) refers to manual focusing.
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance
between the lens and the subject is determined and you do not want to
activate AF.
1
Set the Focus Mode.
● [ ] [Focus Mode] [MF]
● Press the shutter button halfway to
return to the recording screen.
2
Press [ ] ( ).
3
Select the focus point.
● Press to select the focus
point.
• To return the point to be brought into
focus to the center, press [DISP.].
147
6. Focus/Zoom
4
Confirm your selection.
● Press .
● This switches to the MF Assist
screen, and shows an enlarged
display.
5
Adjust the focus.
The operations used to focus differ depending on the lens.
When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring
Press
: Focuses on nearby subject
Press
: Focuses on distant subject
Slide bar
• Pressing and holding will increase the focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide bar.
When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring
Rotate to
side: Focuses on nearby subject
Rotate to
side: Focuses on distant subject
When using the interchangeable lens having a focus lever
Move to
side: Focuses on nearby subject
Move to
side: Focuses on distant subject
• The focusing speed varies depending on how far
you move the focus lever.
148
6. Focus/Zoom
• This will display the in-focus portion
highlighted with color. (Focus Peaking)
• A recording distance guideline is
displayed. (MF Guide)
MF Assist (enlarged screen)
Focus Peaking
MF Guide
6
Close the MF Assist screen.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● This operation can also be
performed by pressing
.
7
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button fully.
149
6. Focus/Zoom
Operations on the MF Assist Screen
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
*
1
Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
—
*
2
Switches magnification window (windowed
mode/full screen mode)
*
3
.
[DISP.]
*
1
[Reset]
*
1
First time: Returns the MF Assist position to the
center.
Second time: Returns the MF Assist
magnification to the default setting.
—
The AF operates.
*
4
*
1 When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing
to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
*
2
Cannot be set when using [
] mode.
*
3 When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approx. 3x to 6x; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approx. 3x to 20x.
*
4 Auto Focus also works with the following operations.
– Pressing the Fn button to which [AF-ON] is assigned (210)
– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to
focus on
150
6. Focus/Zoom
• On the recording screen, you can rotate the focus ring to display the MF
Assist screen. If the focus ring has been rotated to enlarge the display, the
assist screen will be exited a certain amount of time after you cease the
operation.
• The recording distance reference mark
is a mark used to measure the recording
distance.
Use this when taking pictures with
manual focusing or taking close-up
pictures.
• When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring and in the following
cases, manual focus operations may not be possible during recording if the
shutter speed is very slow.
– [
] mode (When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M])
– [
] mode (When [S&Q Exposure Mode] is set to [M])
(When using an interchangeable lens with a focus ring, you can do manual
focus operations, but autofocus does not work during manual focus.)
• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. You
can, however, display MF Assist by directly operating the camera using the
touch screen or a button.
• You can memorize the MF Assist position separately for vertical and
horizontal orientations:
[
] [ ] [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (335)
• You can set the movement of the MF Assist position to loop:
[
] [ ] [Loop Movement Focus Frame] (335)
• You can change the display method of the magnified screen:
[
] [ ] [MF Assist] (336)
• You can disable focus ring operation:
[
] [ ] [Focus Ring Lock] (339)
• You can change the Focus Peaking sensitivity and the display method:
[
] [ ] [Peaking] (342)
• You can change the MF Guide display:
[
] [ ] [MF Guide] (345)
• The camera memorizes the focus point when you turn it off:
[
] [ ] [Lens Position Resume] (347)
151
6. Focus/Zoom
Recording with Zoom
Use the optical zoom of the lens to zoom to telephoto or wide-angle.
: Telephoto, Enlarges distant subject
: Wide-angle, Widens angle of view
Interchangeable
lens with a zoom
ring
Rotate the zoom ring.
Interchangeable
lens that supports
the power zoom
(electrically
operated zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies
depending on how far you
move the lever.)
• If you set [Zoom Control]
to an Fn button, you can
operate the optical zoom
slowly by pressing
or
fast by pressing
.
Interchangeable
lens that does not
support the zoom
The optical zoom is not available.
152
6. Focus/Zoom
Extended Tele Conversion
[Ex. Tele Conv.] enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom, without any deterioration
in image quality.
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
• The [Ex. Tele Conv.] maximum magnification ratio differs depending on the [Picture
Size] and [Aspect Ratio] set in the [Rec] menu.
– When the setting is set to [
M]: up to 1.4x
– When the setting is set to [
S]: up to 2.0x
Set [Picture Size] to [M] or [S].
• [ ] [Picture Size] [M]/[S]
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[ZOOM] Changes the zoom magnification.
[TELE CONV.] Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF] —
153
6. Focus/Zoom
Changing the Zoom Magnification (Button operation)
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]
Set the Fn button to [Zoom Control]. (292)
Press the Fn button.
Press the cursor buttons to operate the
zoom.
: T (telephoto)
: W (wide-angle)
• Press the Fn button again, or wait a
specified time to end zoom operation.
Zoom magnifications
EX2.0x
Changing the Zoom Magnification (Touch operation)
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [ZOOM].
• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.] [ZOOM]
Touch [ ].
Touch [ ].
Drag the slide bar to operate the
zoom.
: Telephoto
: Wide-angle
• To end Touch Zoom operations, touch
[
] again.
154
6. Focus/Zoom
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture])
Set [Rec Quality] to [FHD] or [HD].
• [ ] [Rec Quality] [FHD]/[HD]
Set [Ex. Tele Conv.].
• [ ] [Ex. Tele Conv.]
[ON] Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[OFF] —
• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation])
menu, you can display the Extended Tele Conversion setting screen for both
pictures and video by pressing the assigned Fn button. While this screen is
displayed, you can change the [Picture Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].
• When the following functions are being used, [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not
available:
– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop] ([
] mode)
– [
] ([Quality])
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [HDR]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [4K Live Cropping]
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) is not available in the following case.
– [Handheld Night Shot] ([
] mode)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) is not available in the following case.
– When using the HDMI output during recording (Except in [
] mode)
• During Self Shot Mode, you cannot perform zoom operation by touching.
155
6. Focus/Zoom
[Digital Zoom]
You can increase the zoom ratio 2x higher than the original zoom ratio.
Note that, with Digital Zoom, enlarging will decrease picture quality.
[ ]/[ ] Select [Digital Zoom]
Settings: [2x]/[OFF]
• When using [Digital Zoom], we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer
(184) for taking pictures.
• When the following functions are being used, [Digital Zoom] is not available.
– [Toy Effect], [Toy Pop], [Miniature Effect] ([
] mode)
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
– [Post Focus]
– [HDR]
– [Multi Exp.]
156
6. Focus/Zoom
Power Zoom Lens
Sets the screen display and operations when using an interchangeable
lens that is compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
• This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom
(electrically operated zoom).
[ ] [ ] Select [Power Zoom Lens]
[Disp Focal
Length]
Displays the focal length on the
recording screen during zoom control.
Focal distance indication
Current focal distance
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with
this setting [ON], the zoom will
stop at positions corresponding to
predetermined distances.
Step zoom indication
This setting does not work when
recording video or 4K photos with
[
] ([4K Pre-Burst]).
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not
change.
[Photo]:
[H] (High speed) / [M] (Middle speed) / [L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed) / [M] (Middle speed) / [L] (Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens
with a zoom lever and zoom ring is attached.
When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring
are disabled to prevent accidental operation.
157
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Selecting the Drive Mode
You can switch the drive mode to Single, Burst, etc. to match the
recording conditions.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Select the drive mode.
● Press to select the drive mode
and press
.
• You can also select by rotating .
[Single]
Takes one picture each time the shutter button is
pressed.
[Burst] (158)
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is
pressed and held.
[4K PHOTO]
(162)
When the shutter button is pressed, a picture is
recorded with the 4K Photo function.
[Post Focus]
(176)
When the shutter button is pressed, the pictures are
recorded with [Post Focus].
[Self Timer]
(184)
Takes pictures when the set time elapses after the
shutter button is pressed.
• Select [
] to return to [Single] (default setting).
158
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Taking Burst Pictures
Takes pictures continuously while the shutter button is pressed and held.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Press to select [Burst] and
press
.
• You can also select by rotating .
3
Select the burst rate.
● Press to select the burst rate
and press
.
Settings: [H] (High speed)/
[M] (Middle speed)/
[L] (Low speed)
• You can also select by rotating or .
• The burst rate can also be set using
[Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.
4
Start recording.
• Takes burst pictures while the shutter
button is pressed fully.
159
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Burst Rate
Electronic front
curtain
Electronic shutter
Live View when
taking burst
pictures
[H]
High speed
6 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
5 frames/second
([AFF]/[AFC])
10 frames/second
([AFS]/[MF])
10 frames/second
([AFF]/[AFC])
None ([AFS]/[MF])
Available
([AFF]/[AFC])
[M]
Medium speed
4 frames/second 4 frames/second Available
[L]
Low speed
2 frames/second 2 frames/second Available
• The burst rate may be lower depending on the settings for recording such as
[Picture Size] and focus mode.
Maximum Number of Frames Recordable
[Quality]
/
/ /
[H]
High speed
480 frames or more 20 frames or more
[M]
Medium speed
[L]
Low speed
• When recording under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
Recording conditions may reduce the maximum number of frames recordable.
• The burst rate will become lower during recording but pictures can continue to be
taken until the card becomes full.
160
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken Continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway,
the number of pictures that can be taken
continuously will appear on the recording
screen.
Example) When 20 frames: [r20]
• Once recording starts, the number of pictures that
can be taken continuously will decrease. When [r0]
appears, the burst rate decreases.
• When [r99+] is displayed on the recording screen,
you can take 100 or more burst pictures.
Focus when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode
[Focus/Release
Priority] (334)
[H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
Fixed to the focus of the first frame[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFF]/[AFC]
[FOCUS] Estimated focus Normal focus
[BALANCE]
Estimated focus
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with manual focus
• When the subject is dark with [AFF] or [AFC], the focus is fixed to that of the first
frame.
• With estimated focus, the burst rate takes priority and the focus is estimated to the
extent possible.
• With normal focus, the burst rate may become slow.
161
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Exposure when Taking Burst Pictures
Focus mode [H] [M]/[L]
[AFS]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[AFF]/[AFC]
The exposure is adjusted
for each frame
[MF]
Fixed to the exposure of
the first frame
How to Cancel [Burst]
Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].
• It may take a while to save burst pictures.
If you continue to take burst pictures while saving is in progress, the
maximum number of frames recordable will be reduced.
When taking burst pictures, we recommend using a high-speed card.
• Taking burst pictures does not work while you are using the following
functions:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft
Image of a Flower] ([
] mode)
– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft
Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– Flash
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
162
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
4K Photo Recording
With 4K photo, you can take high-speed burst pictures at 30 frames/
second and save the desired pictures, each made up of approx. 8 million
pixels.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
• The angle of view becomes narrower.
• When the recording time of a single session exceeds 10 minutes, recording
stops.
• If the camera temperature rises, [
] may be displayed and recording may
stop. Wait until the camera cools down.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Press to select [4K
PHOTO] and press
.
• You can also select by rotating .
163
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
3
Select [Rec Method].
● Press to select the recording
method and press
.
• You can also select by rotating or .
• The recording method can also be set
using [4K PHOTO] in the [Rec] menu.
([4K Burst])
When you wish to capture the best moments of a
fast-moving subject
Takes burst pictures while the shutter button is
pressed.
Audio recording: None
([4K Burst(S/S)])
“S/S” is an
abbreviation for start/
stop.
When you wish to capture an unpredictable photo
opportunity
Starts taking burst pictures when the shutter button is
pressed. Pressing the button again stops taking burst
pictures.
The start tone and stop tone are output.
Audio recording: Available
*
1
([4K Pre-Burst])
When you wish to capture at the moment of a
photo opportunity
Takes burst pictures for approx. 1 second before and
after the moment the shutter button is pressed.
The shutter sound is output once only.
Recording duration:
Approx. 2 seconds
Audio recording: None
*
1 Audio is not played back during playback with the camera.
164
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
4
Start recording.
• [Continuous AF] works and the focus is adjusted continuously during recording
with AF.
[4K Burst]
1
Press the shutter button halfway.
2
Press the shutter button fully and keep it
pressed during recording.
Press and hold
Recording is performed
• Press the shutter button fully early because recording will take approx.
0.5 seconds to start after it is pressed fully.
[4K Burst(S/S)]
1
Press the shutter button fully to start
recording.
2
Press the shutter button fully again to stop
recording.
Start (First)
Stop (Second)
Recording is performed
• You can add markers (white marker) by pressing [Fn2] during recording.
(Up to 40 markers per recording)
This allows you to skip to the positions where you added markers when
selecting pictures from a 4K burst file.
165
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[4K Pre-Burst]
Press the shutter button fully.
Approx. 1 second
Recording is performed
• While the recording screen is displayed,
the AF will operate constantly to continue
focusing.
The exposure is also adjusted continuously,
except in [
] mode.
• When the subject is not at the center, use
AF/AE Lock if you wish to lock the focus and
exposure. (210)
• In default settings, Auto Review operates, and a screen that lets you select
pictures from a burst file will be displayed.
To continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to return to the
recording screen.
For how to select and save pictures from a recorded 4K burst file, refer to
page 168.
[Pre-Burst Recording] ([4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approx. 1 second before the shutter button is
pressed fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
[ ] [4K PHOTO] Select [Pre-Burst Recording]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [Pre-Burst Recording] is being used, [ ] is displayed on the recording
screen.
• The AF behavior and functionality restrictions when using [Pre-Burst Recording]
are the same as for [4K Pre-Burst].
166
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
How To cancel the 4K Photo functions
Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].
• When you perform [Light Composition] or [Sequence Composition], we
recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control function (389).
• Taking pictures of yourself (4K Selfie)
You can switch to 4K Photo Mode and take pictures of yourself. (87)
In Self Shot Mode, you can take pictures with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)], a
setting that allows you to include a wider background. (In modes other than
Self Shot Mode, the setting will switch to [4K Burst].)
• Setting ranges become the following with 4K photo recording:
– Shutter speed: 1/30 to 1/16000
– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30]
– Exposure compensation: ±3 EV
• The file save method differs depending on the type of card.
– SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue recording if the file size exceeds
4 GB.
– SDXC memory card:
Files are not divided for recording.
• When recording, the angle of view becomes narrower. (Except when
recording with [4K Burst (Wide-angle)])
• When recording 4K photos, the following functions are not available:
– [Destination] ([Travel Date])
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (111, 225)
– HDMI output
• When recording using the [4K Pre-Burst] function, Step Zoom does not
operate.
• Scene Detection in [
] / [ ] mode works the same way as when
recording video.
• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains
faster and the camera temperature rises. Set these settings only when
recording.
167
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• For 4K photo, the menu items below are fixed to the following settings:
– [Picture Size]:4K (8M)
[4:3]: 3328×2496
[16:9]: 3840×2160
[3:2]: 3504×2336
[1:1]: 2880×2880
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [Quality]: [
]
• With 4K photo recording, the following functions are not available:
– [AFF] ([Focus Mode])
– Flash
– [Bracket]
– Program Shift
– [
] ([AF Mode])
– [MF Assist] ([4K Pre-Burst] only)
• When you record in an extremely bright location or under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, the coloring or brightness of the image may
change or horizontal stripes may appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• 4K photo recording does not work while you are using the following
functions:
– [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations],
[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower]
([
] mode)
– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft
Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
168
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Selecting Pictures from a 4K Burst File
You can select pictures from the 4K burst files and save them.
• When continuing to select pictures from the Auto Review after recording 4K photos,
start the operation from either Step
2 or 3.
1
Select a 4K burst file on the
playback screen. (270)
● Select an image with the [ ]
icon and then press
.
● You can also perform the same
operation by touching [
].
• If the images were recorded with [4K Pre-
Burst], proceed to Step
3.
2
Roughly select the scene.
● Drag the slide bar .
• For information about how to use the
picture selection slide view screen, refer
to page 170.
• If the images were recorded with [4K
Burst] or [4K Burst(S/S)], touching
[
] allows you to select the scene in
the 4K burst playback screen. (172)
Picture selection slide view
screen
3
Select the frame to save.
● Drag the picture selection slide
view
.
● You can also perform the same
operation by pressing
.
• To continuously rewind or forward frame-
by-frame, touch and hold [
]/[ ].
169
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
4
Save the picture.
● Touch [ ].
● A confirmation screen appears.
• The picture is saved in JPEG format.
• The recording information (Exif information), such as the shutter speed,
aperture, and ISO sensitivity, is also saved with the picture that is saved.
170
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Picture Selection Operations
Picture Selection Slide View Screen Operations
Slide bar
Picture selection slide view
Position of displayed frame
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
/
Drag/
Selects a frame.
• To change the frames displayed in the picture
selection slide view, select the frame at the left/
right end and then touch [
] or [ ].
Press and
hold
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds or forwards frame-by-frame.
—
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display.
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display in small steps.
— Enlarges or reduces the display.
—
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged
display (during enlarged display).
171
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
—
Switches a marker to be displayed.
[Fn1]
Displays the 4K burst playback screen.
—
Switches to marker operation.
—
/
Adds or deletes a marker (white marker).
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with color
([Peaking]).
• Switches in order of [
] → [ ]
([LOW]) → [
] ([HIGH]).
Saves the picture.
• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
4K burst file. Touch [
] to return to the previous operation.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Moves to the next marker.
Moves to the previous marker.
172
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
4K burst playback screen
While paused During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
/
Performs continuous playback or pauses
(during continuous playback).
/
Performs continuous rewind playback or
pauses (during continuous rewind playback).
/
/
Performs fast-forward playback or performs
frame-by-frame forwarding (while paused).
/
/
Performs fast-rewind playback or performs
frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).
—
Touch/drag
Selects the frame to display (while paused).
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges or reduces the display in small
steps (while paused).
—
Enlarges or reduces the display (while
paused).
—
Selects a frame while maintaining the
enlarged display (during enlarged display).
Drag
Moves the enlarged display position (during
enlarged display).
—
Switches a marker to be displayed.
[Fn1]
Displays the picture selection slide view
screen (while paused).
—
Switches to marker operation.
173
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
—
/
Adds or deletes a marker (white marker).
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Peaking]).
• Switches in order of [
] →
[
] ([LOW]) → [ ] ([HIGH]).
Saves the picture (while paused).
• During marker operation, you can skip to set markers or the beginning or end of the
4K burst file. Touch [
] to return to the previous operation.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
— Moves to the next marker.
— Moves to the previous marker.
• To select and save pictures from a 4K burst file on a PC, use the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.
However, it is not possible to treat 4K burst files as videos in
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
174
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Auto Marking function
The camera automatically sets markers on
scenes in which a face or the movement
of a subject is detected. (Green marker)
(Example: At the scene when a vehicle
passes by, a balloon bursts, or a person
turns around)
• Up to 10 markers are displayed for each file.
Markers set manually
Markers set by the Auto Marking function
Switches a marker to be displayed
Touch [
] on the slide view screen, 4K burst playback screen, or
marker operation screen.
[Auto]
Displays a marker on a scene in which a face or the
movement of a subject is detected.
[Face Priority]
Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in
which a face is detected.
[Motion Priority]
Displays a marker with preference given to a scene in
which the movement of a subject is detected.
[Off] Displays manually set markers only.
• You cannot delete markers set by the Auto Marking function.
• Markers may not be set by the Auto Marking function depending on the
recording conditions and the status of subjects.
• In the following cases, markers set by the Auto Marking function are not
displayed.
– 4K burst files recorded with [4K Pre-Burst]
175
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 4K burst file all at
once.
Select [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
• [ ] [4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
Press to select a 4K burst file and then press .
• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames are saved as pictures.
Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved all at once and then
press
.
• The pictures are saved as a group of burst pictures in JPEG format.
176
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Post-Focus Recording
Taking burst pictures with the same image quality as 4K photos while
automatically changing the focus point.
You can select the focus point for the picture to save after recording.
Also Focus Stacking lets you combine images with multiple focus points.
This function is suitable for subjects that do not move.
Perform burst 4K
photo recording while
automatically shifting
the focus.
Touch the desired
focus point.
A picture with the
desired focus point is
made.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 or higher card when recording.
• The angle of view during recording becomes narrower.
• If you are going to perform Focus Stacking after recording, we recommend
using a tripod during recording.
• If the camera temperature rises, [
] may be displayed and recording may
stop. Wait until the camera cools down.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
177
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
2
Press to select [Post
Focus] and press
.
• You can also select by rotating .
3
Decide on the composition and
then adjust the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● AF detects the focus point on the
screen. (Excluding the edges of the
screen)
• If no areas on the screen can be brought
into focus, the focus indication
blinks
and recording is not possible.
• Maintain the same distance to the subject
and the same composition until recording
finishes.
4
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button fully.
178
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• Recording is performed while
automatically changing the focus point.
When the icon
disappears, recording
ends automatically.
• Audio will not be recorded.
• In default settings, Auto Review operates,
and a screen that lets you select the
focus point will be displayed. (179)
How To Cancel [Post Focus]
Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].
• Since recording is performed with the same image quality as 4K photos,
limitations apply to recording functions and menus.
• Focus settings cannot be changed during Post-Focus recording.
• [Digital Zoom] is not available.
• When the following functions are being used, [Post Focus] is not available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Glistening Water], [Artistic Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations],
[Handheld Night Shot], [Clear Night Portrait], [Soft Image of a Flower]
([
] mode)
– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft
Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
179
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Selecting the Focus Point for the Picture to Save
1
Select a Post-Focus image on
the playback screen. (270)
● Select an image with the [ ]
icon and then press
.
● You can also perform the same
operation by touching the [
]
icon.
2
Touch the focus point.
• When the point is in focus, a green frame
appears.
• If there is no picture with the selected
point in focus, a red frame appears.
A picture cannot be saved.
• The edge of the screen cannot be
selected.
3
Save the picture.
● Touch [ ].
• The picture is saved in JPEG format.
180
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Focus Point Selection Operations
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
/
Touch
Selects a focus position.
• Selection is not possible during enlarged
display.
Enlarges the display.
• During enlarged display, you can fine-adjust
the focus by dragging the slide bar.
(You can also perform the same operation
by pressing
.)
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
[Fn1]
Switches to Focus Stacking operation. (181)
—
Displays the in-focus portion highlighted with
color ([Peaking]).
• Switches in order of [
] → [ ]
([LOW]) → [
] ([HIGH]).
Saves the picture.
• You cannot display an image on a TV screen and then select the focus
point.
181
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Focus Stacking
By merging multiple focus points, you can save pictures that are focused
from the foreground through to the background.
Focus
Focus: closer
Focus: more distant
1
On the screen for selecting
the focus point in Step
2 on
page 179, touch [
].
● You can also perform the same
operation by pressing [Fn1].
2
Select the merging method.
[Auto
Merging]
Automatically selects
pictures suitable for merging
and then merges them into a
single picture.
[Range
Merging]
Merges pictures with
selected focus points into a
single picture.
Auto Merging
Range Merging
182
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
3
(When [Range Merging] is
selected)
Touch the focus points.
• Select at least two points.
Selected points are indicated with a
green frame.
• The in-focus range between the two
selected points is displayed in green.
• Ranges that cannot be selected are
displayed in gray.
• To cancel the selection, touch a point with
a green frame again.
• To select consecutive points, drag the
screen.
Set/CancelSet/Cancel
ResetReset
Set/CancelSet/Cancel
ResetReset
4
Save the picture.
● Touch [ ].
183
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Operations when [Range Merging] Is Selected
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
/
/
Touch Selects a point.
[Fn1] [Set/Cancel] Sets or cancels a point.
[DISP.]
[All]
Selects all points.
(Before selecting points)
[Reset]
Cancels all selections.
(After selecting points)
Merges the pictures and saves the resulting
picture.
• The picture is saved in JPEG format, and the recording information (Exif
information), such as the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity, of the
picture with the closest point is also saved with the picture that is saved.
• Image misalignment due to camera shake will be adjusted automatically. If
adjustments are made, the angle of view will become slightly narrower when
the pictures are merged.
• If the subject moves during recording or the distance between subjects is
great, merging may create an unnatural picture.
184
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Recording Using the Self-timer
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Press to select [Self Timer]
and press
.
• You can also select by rotating .
3
Set the Self-Timer time.
● Press to select the Self-Timer
time and press
.
• You can also select by rotating or .
• It can also be set using [Self Timer] in the
[Rec] or [Motion Picture] menu.
4
Decide on the composition and
then adjust the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
• The focus and exposure are fixed when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
185
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
5
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button
.
• The self-timer light blinks and then the
shutter is released.
Setting item (Self-timer)
Takes a picture after 10 seconds.
Takes 3 pictures at approx. 2 second intervals after 10 seconds.
(When recording video, it will be the same operation with [
].)
Takes a picture after 2 seconds.
• This setting is a convenient way to avoid camera shake caused by
pressing the shutter button.
etc.
(Custom)
It will record after the number of seconds registered in [SET] of [Self
Timer] under the [Rec]/[Motion Picture] menu. (322, 329)
186
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
How To Cancel [Self Timer]
Press [ ] ( ), and then select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ].
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
• When the following functions are being used, [ ] is not available:
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (111, 225)
– [Bracket]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [Live View Composite]
• The self-timer does not work while you are using the following functions:
– Self Shot Mode (When taking pictures in Self Shot Mode, you can set the
Self-timer in [Countdown] (85))
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
187
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
Pictures are taken automatically at a set recording interval.
This feature is ideal for keeping track of changes over time in subjects
such as animals and plants.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can also be
combined into a video.
• Check that the clock is set correctly. (45)
• For long recording intervals, we recommend setting [Lens Position Resume]
to [ON] in the [Custom] ([Lens / Others]) menu.
1
Set the camera to [Time Lapse
Shot].
● [ ] [Time Lapse Shot]
2
Set the recording settings.
[Shooting
Interval Setting]
[ON]
Sets the interval before the next
recording takes place.
[OFF]
Takes pictures without leaving recording
intervals.
[Start Time]
[Now]
Starts recording when the shutter button
is pressed fully.
[Start Time Set] Starts recording at the set time.
[Image Count]/
[Shooting
Interval]
Sets the number of pictures and the recording interval to
be taken.
• [Shooting Interval] is not available when [Shooting
Interval Setting] is set to [OFF].
188
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
3
Press to select [Start] and
press
.
4
Focus on the subject and take
a picture.
• The recording starts by fully-pressing the
shutter button.
• When [Start Time Set] is set, the camera
will enter into sleep status until the start
time is reached.
• During recording standby, the camera
enters into sleep status when no
operation is performed for a certain
period of time.
• The recording will stop automatically.
5
Create a video. (193)
• After the recording has stopped, select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still
create a video with [Time Lapse Video] in
the [Playback] menu. (368)
189
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Operations during Time Lapse Shot Recording
Pressing the shutter button halfway during sleep status will turn on the
camera.
• You can perform the following operations by pressing [Fn2] during Time Lapse
Shot recording.
[Continue] Returns to the recording. (Only during recording)
[Pause] Pauses the recording. (Only during recording)
[Resume]
Resumes the recording. (Only while paused)
• You can also press the shutter button to resume.
[End] Stops the Time Lapse Shot recording.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the correct exposure, so it may not
take pictures at the set interval or take the set number of pictures.
Furthermore, it may not end at the end time displayed on the screen.
• Time Lapse Shot is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [OFF]
You can set the camera on/off switch to [OFF] and replace the battery or
card.
Set the camera on/off switch to [ON] and then press the shutter button
fully to resume recording.
(Note that the images recorded after replacing the card will be saved as a
separate set of group images.)
• [Time Lapse Shot] is not available when using the following functions:
– [Handheld Night Shot] ([
] mode)
– Self Shot Mode
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
190
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Recording with Stop Motion Animation
Take pictures while moving the subject little by little.
The pictures taken will be saved as a set of group images that can be
combined into a stop motion video.
1
Set the camera to [Stop Motion
Animation].
● [ ] [Stop Motion
Animation]
2
Set the recording settings.
[Auto Shooting]
[ON]
Takes pictures automatically at a set recording
interval.
[OFF]
This is for taking pictures manually, frame by
frame.
[Shooting
Interval]
Sets the recording interval for [Auto Shooting].
3
Press to select [Start] and
press
.
4
Press to select [New] and
press
.
191
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
5
Focus on the subject and take
a picture.
● Take pictures repeatedly while
moving the subject little by little.
• The recording screen displays up to two
pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
• You can play back the recorded stop
motion images by pressing [
] during
recording.
Press [
] to delete unnecessary images.
To return to the recording screen, press
[
] again.
6
Stop recording.
● Press and then select [Stop
Motion Animation] from the [Rec]
menu to stop recording.
7
Create a video. (193)
• After the recording has stopped, select
[Yes] on the confirmation screen to
proceed to create a video.
Even if you select [No], you can still
create a video with [Stop Motion Video] in
the [Playback] menu. (368)
192
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• When you select [Additional] in step 4, group pictures recorded using [Stop
Motion Animation] are displayed. Select an image and proceed to Step
5.
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
• If the camera is turned off while recording, a message for resuming the
recording is displayed when it is turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to
continue the recording from the interruption point.
• The camera gives priority to achieving the correct exposure, so it may not
take pictures at the set interval when the flash, etc. is used for recording.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only
one that was taken.
• [Stop Motion Animation] is not available when using the following functions:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
• When the following function is being used, [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion
Animation] is not available:
– [Handheld Night Shot] ([
] mode)
193
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation
Videos
After performing Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation recording,
you can proceed to create a video.
• Refer to the sections below about these recording functions.
– Time Lapse Shot recording: 187
– Stop Motion Animation recording: 190
• You can also create videos with [Time Lapse Video] (368) or [Stop Motion Video]
(368) in the [Playback] menu.
1
Select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen that
appears after recording.
2
Set the options for creating a
video.
3
Select [OK].
[OK] Creates a video.
[Rec Quality] Sets the video image quality.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the video will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL] Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]
Splices pictures together in reverse recording
order.
194
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• Videos cannot be created if the recording time exceeds 29 minutes and
59 seconds.
• In the following cases, videos cannot be created if the file size exceeds
4 GB:
– When an SDHC memory card is being used and a 4K [Rec Quality] is set
– When [Rec Quality] is set to FHD or HD
195
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Bracket Recording
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera can record multiple
images while automatically changing the setting value for exposure,
aperture, focus or white balance.
• Aperture Bracket can be selected in the following modes:
– [
] mode
– [
] mode (when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO])
1
Set [Bracket Type].
● [ ] [Bracket] [Bracket
Type]
2
Set [More Settings].
● For information about [More
Settings], refer to page for each
bracketing method.
3
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
4
Focus on the subject and then
take pictures.
196
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Setting Items ([Bracket Type])
Exposure Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records
while changing the exposure. (198)
Aperture Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records
while changing the aperture value. (198)
Focus Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed, the camera records
while changing the focus point. (199)
White Balance
Bracket
When the shutter button is pressed once, the camera
automatically records three images with the different
white balance adjustment values. (200)
[OFF] —
How to Cancel Bracketing
Select [OFF] in Step 1.
197
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• Bracket recording is not available while you are using the following
functions:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot], [Soft
Image of a Flower] ([
] mode)
– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Miniature Effect], [Soft
Focus], [Star Filter], [Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
• Exposure Bracket, Aperture Bracket, and Focus Bracket are unavailable
when recording with the flash. Aperture Bracket and Focus Bracket can be
used when recording with an external flash.
• When the following functions are being used, White Balance Bracket is not
available.
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– [Burst]
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
– [Filter Settings]
198
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[More Settings] (Exposure Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the image count and exposure compensation step.
[3•1/3] (record 3 images in 1/3 EV steps) to [7•1] (record
7 images in 1 EV steps)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which images are recorded.
[Single Shot
Setting]
[
]: Takes only one image each time the shutter button is
pressed.
[
]: Takes all of the set number of images when the shutter
button is pressed once.
• The [
] icon blinks until all of the set number of pictures
is taken.
• When you record images with Exposure Bracket after setting the exposure
compensation value, the images recorded are based on the selected
exposure compensation value.
[More Settings] (Aperture Bracket)
[Image Count]
[3]/[5]: Records the set number of images while alternately
setting the aperture value in the sequence of one before and
then one after using the initial aperture value as the reference.
[ALL]: Records images using all aperture values.
Example when the initial position is set to F8.0
4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
1st image, 2nd image, 3rd image ... 7th image
• The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.
199
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[More Settings] (Focus Bracket)
[Step]
Sets the focus adjustment step.
• The distance that the focus point is moved becomes shorter if
the initial focus point is close, and longer if it is far away.
[Image Count]
Sets the image count.
• This cannot be set when taking burst pictures.
Burst pictures are taken while the shutter button is pressed.
[Sequence]
[0/–/+]: Records while alternately moving the focus point in the
sequence of forward and then backward using the initial focus
point as the reference.
[0/+]: Records while moving the focus point toward the far side
using the initial focus point as the reference.
Example when [Sequence]: [0/–/+] is set
Example when [Sequence]: [0/+] is set
Focus: closer
Focus: more distant
1st image, 2nd image ... 5th image ...
• Pictures recorded with Focus Bracket are displayed as images of one group.
• [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ESHTR].
200
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[More Settings] (White Balance Bracket)
Rotate or to set the correction step
and then press
.
Horizontal direction: [A] - [B]
Vertical direction: [G] - [M]
• The correction step can also be set by
touching [
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ].
201
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[Silent Mode]
This disables all operation sounds and light output at once.
The audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF assist
light will be set to forced off mode.
• The following settings are fixed:
– [Flash Mode]: [
] (Forced Flash Off)
– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [Beep Volume]: [
] (Off)
– [Shutter Vol.]: [
] (Off)
[ ] Select [Silent Mode]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light/blink:
– Self-timer light
– Wireless Connection Lamp
• When [Live View Composite] is being used, [Silent Mode] is not available.
• Use this function at your own responsibility sufficiently considering the
privacy, portrait, and other rights of subjects.
202
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
[Shutter Type]
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
[ ] Select [Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the
recording conditions and shutter speed.
[EFC] Records with the electronic front curtain type.
[ESHTR] Records with the electronic shutter type.
Electronic front curtain
type
Electronic shutter type
Mechanism
This type starts exposure
electronically and ends it
with the mechanical shutter.
This type starts and ends
exposure electronically.
Flash
—
Shutter speed (sec.)
[T] (Time,
max. approx. 60 seconds)
*
1
,
60 to 1/500
1
*
2
to 1/16000
Shutter sound
Mechanical shutter sound
+
Electronic shutter sound
*
3
Electronic shutter sound
*
3
*
1 This setting is available only in [ ] mode.
*
2 If the ISO sensitivity is higher than [3200], the shutter speed will be faster than
1 second.
*
3 The electronic shutter sound can be set in [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone] in
[Beep] of the [Setup] menu. (354)
203
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, recording will be with the electronic
shutter type.
• When a moving subject is recorded using the electronic shutter, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture.
• When you record using the electronic shutter under lighting such as
fluorescent or LED lighting, horizontal stripes may be recorded. In such a
case, lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of horizontal stripes.
• When the following functions are being used, [Shutter Type] is not available:
– [Live View Composite]
– [Silent Mode]
– Focus Bracket ([Bracket])
• To reduce shutter-induced blur, you can set the shutter to release a few
seconds after the shutter button is pressed:
[
] [Shutter Delay] (323)
204
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Image Stabilizer
The camera detects jitter during recording and automatically corrects it, so
you can record images with reduced jitter.
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch on the lens to ON.
• When you use a lens with no connection function with the camera,
[Stabilizer] cannot be selected.
• When you use a lens without the stabilizer function, [Operation Mode]
cannot be selected.
205
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
Image Stabilizer Settings
Set the image stabilizer operation to match the recording situation.
[ ] / [ ] Select [Stabilizer]
[Operation
Mode]
Sets the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording
method (normal, panning). (206)
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[HIGH]
This will stabilize strong jitter. (Since the
stabilizing width is large, the angle of view is
narrowed.)
• [
] is displayed on the screen during video
recording.
[STANDARD]
This will stabilize jitter. (The angle of view may
become narrow.)
• [
] is displayed on the screen during video
recording.
[OFF]
This will turn off the electronic stabilization
(Video).
Camera shake during video recording is corrected along
the vertical, horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes through the
combined use of the in-lens and electronic image stabilizers.
(5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
• If the recording screen icon is not indicated with [
] or
[
] even when Panasonic interchangeable lens that
supports Dual I.S.2 is being used, update the lens firmware
to the latest version. For the latest information on supported
lenses or to download their firmware, refer to our support site.
(20)
• When using an interchangeable lens that does not support
Dual I.S.2 or when [Operation Mode] is set to [OFF], [
]
(Strong) or [
] (Standard) is displayed.
206
7. Drive/Shutter/Image Stabilizer
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera shake alert icon
[
] may be displayed on the recording screen.
If this is displayed, we recommend using a tripod, the self timer or the
shutter remote control function (389).
• We recommend turning off the image stabilizer function when using a tripod.
• When the following functions are being used, [E-Stabilization (Video)] is not
available:
– [
] mode
– [Digital Zoom]
– [4K Live Cropping]
[Operation Mode]
Set the stabilization movement (blur) to match the recording method
(normal, panning).
[Normal]
Corrects vertical, horizontal, and rotational camera shake.
This function is suitable for normal recording.
[Panning]
Corrects vertical camera shake.
This is suitable for horizontal panning.
[OFF] Turns the in-lens image stabilization function OFF.
• The image stabilizers to be activated differ depending on your lens.
• When using lenses with an O.I.S. switch, the camera’s operation mode cannot be
set to [OFF]. Set the switch on the lens to OFF.
• When the following functions are being used, [
] ([Panning]) switches to [ ]
([Normal]):
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
207
8. Brightness (Exposure)/
Coloring/Picture effect
[Metering Mode]
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
[ ]/[ ] Select [Metering Mode]
Multi-metering
Method in which the most suitable exposure is measured
by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole
screen.
Center-weighted
Method used to perform measuring which focuses on the
center of the screen.
Spot
Method used to measure the
extremely small part around the spot-
metering target
.
• When you move the AF area, the
spot metering target also moves
to match.
208
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Exposure Compensation
You can compensate the exposure when the correct exposure determined
by the camera is too bright or too dark.
You can adjust the exposure in 1/3 EV steps in a range of ±5 EV.
When recording videos or recording with 4K photo or Post-Focus, the
range changes to ±3 EV.
1
Press [ ].
2
Compensate the exposure.
● Rotate or .
3
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
209
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
• In [ ] mode, you can compensate the exposure by setting the ISO
sensitivity to [AUTO].
• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds ±3 EV, the
brightness of the recording screen will no longer change.
Press the shutter button halfway or use AE Lock to reflect the value on the
recording screen.
• The set exposure compensation value is stored even if you turn off the
camera.
• You can set the exposure compensation value to be reset when the camera
is turned off:
[
] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Reset] (331)
• Exposure Bracket can be set and flash output can be adjusted on the
exposure compensation screen:
[
] [ ] [Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting] (337)
210
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE
Lock)
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same
focus and exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or
there is a backlight, for example.
1
Register [AF/AE LOCK] to the Fn button. (292)
• These cannot be registered to [Fn5] to [Fn9].
2
Lock focus and exposure.
● Press and hold the Fn button.
● If focus is locked, then the AF lock
icon
will be displayed.
● If exposure is locked, then the AE
lock icon
will be displayed.
3
Hold the Fn button to decide on the composition and
then perform recording.
● Press the shutter button fully.
211
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Setting the function of [AF/AE LOCK]
[ ] [ ] Select [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK] The exposure is locked.
[AF LOCK] The focus is locked.
[AF/AE LOCK] Both focus and exposure are locked.
[AF-ON] Auto Focus is activated.
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
• You can maintain lock even without pressing and holding the Fn button:
[
] [ ] [AF/AE Lock Hold] (331)
212
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
ISO Sensitivity
You can set light sensitivity (ISO sensitivity).
With the default settings, you can set 200 to 25600 in 1/3 EV increments.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Select ISO sensitivity.
● Rotate or .
2
00
4
0
3
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
Characteristics of the ISO Sensitivity
By increasing the ISO sensitivity, the shutter speed can be increased in
dark places to prevent camera shake and subject blur. However, higher ISO
sensitivities also increase the amount of noise in the recorded images.
213
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Setting Items (ISO Sensitivity)
[AUTO]
ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200
depending on the brightness of a subject.
(Intelligent ISO)
ISO sensitivity is automatically set in a range up to 3200
depending on the movement and brightness of a subject.
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the
movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed
fully.
[200] to [25600]
The ISO sensitivity is fixed at the selected value.
• You can extend the ISO sensitivity lower limit to [100] by
setting [Extended ISO] (331) to [ON] in the [Custom]
([Exposure]) menu.
• When the following functions are being used, [
] is not available:
– [
] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode, [ ] mode
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Live View Composite]
• When the following functions are being used, the ISO sensitivity that can be set is
restricted.
– [
] mode, [ ] mode, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]: [6400] (upper limit)
– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style]): [400] (lower limit)
– [Filter Settings]: [3200] (upper limit) (When set to [High Dynamic], the setting is
fixed to [AUTO].)
– [Live View Composite]: [200] (lower limit) (When [Extended ISO] is set to [ON],
the setting will be [L.100].), [1600] (upper limit)
– [Multi Exp.]: [200] (lower limit), [3200] (upper limit)
214
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
• During video recording, the camera operates as [AUTO] (for video). (When
not in [
] / [ ] mode)
• You can set upper and lower limits for ISO Auto:
[
] [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (319)
[
] [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (262)
• You can set the lower limit for shutter speed for ISO Auto:
[
] [Min. Shtr Speed] (319)
• You can change the intervals between ISO sensitivity settings values:
[
] [ ] [ISO Increments] (331)
• You can set the upper limit for ISO Auto on the ISO sensitivity settings
screen:
[
] [ ] [ISO Displayed Setting] (337)
215
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
White Balance (WB)
White balance (WB) is a function that corrects the color cast produced by
the light illuminating the subject.
It corrects the colors so that white objects appear in white to make the
overall color closer to what is seen by the eye.
Normally, you can use auto ([AWB], [AWBc] or [AWBw]) to obtain the
optimal white balance.
Set this function when the coloring of the image is different from what you
expected, or you want to change the coloring to capture the ambience.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Select the white balance.
● Rotate or .
216
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
3
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
Setting Items (White Balance)
[AWB] Auto
[AWBc]
Auto (Reduces the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[AWBw]
Auto (Leaves the reddish hue under an incandescent light
source)
[
]
Clear sky
[
]
Cloudy sky
[
]
Shade under a clear sky
[
]
Incandescent light
[
]
*
1
Flash
[
] to [ ]
Set mode 1 to 4 (218)
[
] to [ ]
Color temperatures 1 to 4 (218)
*
1 It operates as [AWB] during video recording or when recording with [4K PHOTO]
or [Post Focus].
217
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
1 [AWB] will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
K=Kelvin Color Temperature
• Under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, the appropriate white
balance will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [AWBw] or [
] to [ ].
• The white balance is fixed to [AWB] while [Filter Settings] is being used.
• The White Balance may not operate correctly if you take pictures using a
flash and the subject is recorded outside of the effective flash range.
• In [
] mode, settings suitable for each scene are made.
• In [
] mode, changing the scene or recording mode will return White
Balance settings (including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back
to [AWB].
218
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Registering the White Set ([ ] to [ ])
Take pictures of a white object under the light source of the recording
location to adjust the white balance until it appears white.
Press [ ] ( ) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
Press .
Aim the camera at a white object so that it appears inside the frame at
the center of the screen and then press
.
• This will set the white balance and return you to the recording screen.
• After retrieving the image for noise reduction with [Live View Composite],
the white set registration cannot be used.
Color Temperature Setting ([ ] to [ ])
Set the numeric value for the white balance color temperature.
Press [ ] ( ) and then select any value from [ ] to [ ].
Press .
Press to select the color temperature and then press .
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
219
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
Adjusting the White Balance
You can adjust the coloring even when the coloring you want to apply is
not produced by the selected white balance.
1
Press [ ] ( ).
2
Select the white balance and then press .
● The adjustment screen is displayed.
3
Adjust the coloring.
: [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
: [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
: [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
: [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
• You can also touch the graph to make
adjustments.
• Press [DISP.] to return to the unadjusted
state.
• You can set the White Balance Bracket
by rotating
or . (200)
220
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
4
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
• When the white balance is adjusted, the color of its recording screen icon
changes to the adjusted color.
Adjusting toward the [G] side will display [+], while adjusting toward the [M]
side will display [–].
221
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
[Photo Style]
You can select the finishing settings of images to suit your subjects and
expression styles.
The image quality can be adjusted for each Photo Style.
[ ]/[ ] Select [Photo Style]
[Standard] The standard setting.
[Vivid]
A setting that produces a more vivid quality with
higher saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
A setting that produces a softer quality with lower
contrast.
[Monochrome] A monochrome setting with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
A black-and-white setting with rich gradation and
crisp black accents.
[L.Monochrome D]
A monochrome setting that creates a dynamic
impression with enhanced highlights and shadows.
[Scenery]
A setting suited for sceneries with vivid blue skies
and greens.
[Portrait]
A setting suited for portraits with a healthy and
beautiful skin tone.
[Custom]
Setting for using colors and picture quality that were
registered in advance.
[Cinelike D]
Setting that gives priority to the dynamic range by
using a gamma curve designed to create film-like
images. Suited for editing.
[Cinelike V]
Setting that gives priority to the contrast by using a
gamma curve designed to create film-like images.
[V-Log L]
Gamma curve setting intended for post-production
processing.
• It allows you to add rich gradation to images
during post production editing.
222
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
• In [ ] mode, operation differs from that in other recording modes.
– [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to
another recording mode or it is turned off.
– Image quality cannot be adjusted.
• Only picture quality adjustment can be set in [
] mode.
• When [Filter Settings] is being used, [Photo Style] is not available.
Adjusting Image Quality
Press to select the type of Photo Style.
Press to select an item and then
press
to adjust.
• You can register adjusted details to
[Custom] by pressing [DISP.].
Standard
Press .
• When the image quality is adjusted, the
Photo Style icon on the recording screen is
indicated with [+].
Settings Items (Image Quality Adjustment)
[Contrast]
*
1
Adjusts the contrast in the image.
[Sharpness] Adjusts the outlines in the image.
[Noise Reduction]
Adjusts the noise reduction effect.
• Increasing the effect may cause a slight drop in
picture resolution.
[Saturation]
*
2
Adjusts the vividness of colors.
[Color Tone]
*
3
Adjusts blue and yellow tints.
223
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
[Filter Effect]
*
3
[Yellow]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: weak)
Records the sky with a clear blue.
[Orange]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: medium)
Records the sky with a darker blue.
[Red]
Enhances the contrast. (Effect: strong)
Records the sky with a much darker blue.
[Green]
Skin and lips of people appear in natural
tones.
Green leaves appear brighter and more
enhanced.
[Off] —
[Grain Effect]
*
3
[Low]/
[Standard]/
[High]
Sets the grain effect level.
[Off] —
*
1 Cannot be adjusted when [V-Log L] is selected.
*
2 Available when anything other than [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome],
[L.Monochrome D] or [V-Log L] is selected.
*
3 Available when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome D] is selected.
• The effects of [Grain Effect] cannot be checked on the recording screen.
• [Grain Effect] is not available when using the following functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
224
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
[Filter Settings]
This mode records with additional image effects (filters) just like in the
[
] mode. (111)
You can adjust the effect for each filter.
In addition, you can simultaneously take pictures without effects.
[ ]/[ ] [Filter Settings] Select [Filter Effect]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
Setting a Filter with Touch Operation
Touch [ ].
Touch the item to set.
[
]: Filter on/off
[
]: Filter
[
]: Filter effect adjustment
• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions
which are not available in [
] mode.
• White balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be fixed to [
]
(Forced Flash Off).
• The upper limit to ISO sensitivity is [3200].
• When [High Dynamic] is set, the ISO sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].
• [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter] and
[Sunshine] are not available during video recording.
• [Filter Effect] is not available when using the following functions:
– [Live View Composite]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [4K Live Cropping]
225
8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect
[Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
You can simultaneously take pictures with no added filter effects.
[ ]/[ ] [Filter Settings] Select [Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] is not available when using the following
functions:
– [Burst]
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– Taking still pictures while a video is being recorded (when [
] ([Video
Priority]) is set)
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
– [Bracket]
226
9. Flash
Using a Flash
Open/Close the built-in flash
To open the flash
To close the flash
• The flash setting is fixed to [ ] (Forced
Flash Off) while the flash is closed.
(Except when using an external flash)
• Be careful not to catch a finger or any other part of your body or any object
when you close the flash.
• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the camera.
• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in use.
• Do not bring any objects near the flash or block the flash. Heat or light may
cause the object to deform or discolor.
• Do not block the flash with your hand while it is firing.
• Do not close the flash immediately after the preliminary flash is operated
prior to taking pictures for Forced ON/Red-Eye Reduction and other flash
settings. If you close the flash immediately, it will cause a malfunction.
• If you record repeatedly, time may be needed to charge the flash.
While the flash is charging, images will be recorded without the flash firing.
• When an External Flash is attached, it will have priority over the built-in
flash. For information about external flash, refer to (447).
227
9. Flash
Setting Flash
You can set the flash function to control flash firing from the camera.
[Flash Mode]
Sets the flash mode.
[ ] [Flash] Select [Flash
Mode]
Forced Flash On
Forced On/Red-Eye
The flash fires every time regardless of the recording
conditions.
This is suitable for recording when there is
backlighting or under lighting such as fluorescent
lighting.
Slow Sync.
Slow Sync./Red-Eye
When recording images against a nightscape, this will
slow the shutter speed when the flash fires to make
not only the subject but also the nightscape appear
brighter.
• Slower shutter speeds may result in blurry images.
To avoid this, we recommend using a tripod.
Forced Flash Off The flash does not fire.
• For details about flash settings in [
] / [ ] mode, refer to (78).
228
9. Flash
• The flash fires twice.
The interval between the first and second firings is longer when [
] or
[
] is set. The subject should not move until the second firing has
finished.
• [
] and [ ] cannot be used when the following are set:
– [Flash Synchro]: [2ND]
– [Wireless]: [ON]
• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the settings on the
external flash.
• The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies from person to person.
The effect, which is influenced by factors such as distance to the subject
and whether the subject is looking at the camera when the preliminary flash
is fired, may not be very noticeable in some cases.
229
9. Flash
Available Flash Settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
( : Available, —: Not available)
Recording mode
/
/
— —
(●: Default settings)
[Clear Portrait]
● — —
[Silky Skin] ● — —
[Sweet Child’s Face] ● — —
[Clear Night Portrait] — — — ●
[Soft Image of a Flower] ● — — —
[Appetizing Food] ● — — —
[Cute Dessert] ● — — —
[Freeze Animal Motion] ● — — —
[Clear Sports Shot] ● — — —
[Monochrome] ●
• Flash recording is not possible when the following functions are being used:
– [Backlit Softness], [Relaxing Tone], [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky],
[Romantic Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening Water], [Clear
Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing Nightscape], [Artistic
Nightscape], [Glittering Illuminations], [Handheld Night Shot] ([
]
mode)
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [ESHTR]
– [Silent Mode]
– [HDR]
– [Filter Settings]
• [
] mode flash setting is returned to the initial value with each change of
scene.
230
9. Flash
Shutter Speeds for Flash Modes
[Flash Mode] Shutter speed (sec.)
1/50
*
1
1 to 1/50
*
1 In [ ] mode, the shutter speed will be 60 seconds to 1/50 of a second and in [ ]
mode it will be [T] (Time) or 60 seconds to 1/50 of a second.
• Shutter speeds faster than 1/50 of a second are not available when you fire the
flash.
• In [
] / [ ] mode, the shutter speed changes depending on the detected
scene.
The available flash range (approximation)
When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be blocked or fail to
cover the lens field of view, causing dark areas to appear in the resulting
pictures. Check the distance to the subject when taking a picture.
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Wide Tele
0.4 m (1.3 feet) to 4.1 m (13 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 2.5 m (8.2 feet)
• These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Auto
Upper Limit (Photo)] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is set to [AUTO].
231
9. Flash
• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower
portion of the photo may turn dark and the control of the flash may be
disabled because the photo flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We
recommend detaching the lens hood.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output if a picture taken using the flash is too bright or
too dark.
1
Select [Flash Adjust.].
● [ ] [Flash] [Flash
Adjust.]
2
Press to adjust the flash
output and then press
.
• It can be adjusted within the range of
[–2 EV] to [+2 EV] in 1/3 EV steps.
• When the intensity of the flash is adjusted, [+] or [-] is displayed on the flash
icon.
• For information about adjusting the flash output when recording using a
wireless flash, refer to page 236.
• [Flash Adjust.] cannot be used when [Wireless] is set to [ON].
232
9. Flash
[Flash Synchro]
When a moving subject is recorded at night using a slow shutter and flash,
a trail of light may appear in front of the subject.
If you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND], you can take a dynamic picture with
a trail of light appearing behind the subject by firing the flash immediately
before the shutter closes.
[ ] [Flash] Select [Flash
Synchro]
[1ST]
This is the normal method for recording
with the Flash.
[2ND]
The light source appears behind the
subject and the picture becomes
dynamic.
• When [2ND] is set, [2nd] is displayed on the flash icon of the recording
screen.
• When the following functions are being used, [Flash Synchro] is fixed to
[1ST]:
– [Wireless]
– [Live View Composite]
• The effect may not be adequately achieved at faster shutter speeds.
233
9. Flash
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction with the exposure
compensation value. (208)
[ ] [Flash] Select [Auto Exposure Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Red-Eye Removal]
When [Flash Mode] is set to [ ] or [ ], the camera automatically
detects red-eye and corrects image data.
[ ] Select [Red-Eye Removal]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [ON] is set, [ ] is displayed on the flash icon.
• Red-eye cannot be corrected depending on its appearance.
234
9. Flash
Recording Using a Wireless Flash
You can use a Flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) to record using a wireless flash.
You can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
• The built-in flash does not support wireless flash control.
Placing a Wireless Flash
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing the camera.
Placement example
When C is placed to erase
the shadow in the background
of the subject that the flash
groups A and B will create
Placement range
When DMW-FL200L is attached
7 m (23 feet)
7 m
(23 feet)
5 m
(16 feet)
5 m
(16 feet)
• The placement range serves as a guide for when recording with the
camera held horizontally. The range differs depending on the surrounding
environment.
• We recommend using a maximum of three wireless flashes in each group.
• If the subject is too close, communication light may affect the exposure.
You can reduce the effect by setting [Communication Light] to [LOW] or
lowering the output with a diffuser or similar device. (237)
235
9. Flash
1
Attach an external flash to the
camera. (447)
2
Set the wireless flashes to [RC]
mode and then place them.
• Set the channel and group for the
wireless flashes.
3
Enable the wireless flash
function of the camera.
● [ ] [Flash] [Wireless]
[ON]
4
Set [Wireless Channel].
• Select the same channel as on the
wireless flash side.
5
Set [Wireless Setup].
• Set the firing mode and flash output.
236
9. Flash
Setting Items ([Wireless
Setup])
• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
[External
Flash]
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[AUTO]
*
1
: Sets the flash output on the external flash
side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the external flash
manually.
[OFF]: The external flash outputs only communication
light.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the external flash manually
when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the external flash when [Firing
Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash
output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing
Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[AUTO]: Sets the flash output on the wireless flash
side.
[MANUAL]: Sets the flash output of the wireless flash
manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will
not fire.
[Flash
Adjust.]
Adjusts the flash output of the wireless flash manually
when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual
Flash
Adjust.]
Sets the flash output of the wireless flash when [Firing
Mode] is set to [MANUAL].
• It can be set within the range of [1/1] (full flash
output) to [1/128] in 1/3 steps.
*
1 This cannot be set when using the Flash (DMW-FL200L: optional).
237
9. Flash
[Communication Light]
Set the strength of communication light.
[ ] [Flash] Select [Communication Light]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
238
10. Recording Videos
Recording Videos
1
Start recording.
● Press the video rec. button.
• Release the video rec. button right after
you press it.
Red REC frame indicator (346)
Recording state indicator
Remaining recording time
Elapsed recording time
2
Stop recording.
● Press the video rec. button again.
• If maintaining focus on the subject is difficult during video recording with AF,
press the shutter button halfway to re-adjust the focus.
239
10. Recording Videos
[Rec Quality]
Sets the image quality of videos to be recorded.
[ ] Select [Rec Quality]
[Rec Quality] Picture size
Recording
frame rate
Sensor
output
Bit rate
[4K/100M/30p]
*
1
3840×2160 30p 30 fps 100 Mbps
[4K/100M/24p]
*
1
3840×2160 24p 24 fps 100 Mbps
[FHD/28M/60p] 1920×1080 60p 60 fps 28 Mbps
[FHD/20M/30p] 1920×1080 30p 30 fps 20 Mbps
[FHD/24M/24p] 1920×1080 24p 24 fps 24 Mbps
[HD/10M/30p] 1280×720 30p 30 fps 10 Mbps
*
1 4K video
• The amount of time you can record in a single session varies depending on
[Rec Quality].
When the recording time of a single session exceeds the following duration,
recording stops.
– [4K/100M/30p] / [4K/100M/24p]: 10 minutes
– [FHD/28M/60p]: 20 minutes
– [FHD/20M/30p] / [FHD/24M/24p] / [HD/10M/30p]:
29 minutes and 59 seconds
240
10. Recording Videos
• Since the camera employs the VBR recording format, the bit rate is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. As a result, video
recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is recorded.
• When the following functions are being used, 4K video cannot be set.
– [Miniature Effect] ([
] mode)
– HDMI output
• To record 4K videos, use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
• When you record 4K videos, the angle of view will be narrower than videos
of other sizes.
• To ensure highly accurate focus, 4K videos are recorded at reduced Auto
Focus speeds. It may be difficult to focus on the subject with Auto Focus,
but this is not a malfunction.
Size Interval for Dividing Files
[Rec Quality]
[4K]
When using an SDHC memory card:
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.
When using an SDXC memory card:
Even if the file size exceeds 4 GB, a single
file will be recorded.
[FHD]/[HD]
A new file will be created to continue
recording if the file size exceeds 4 GB.
• If an operation such as a zoom or button operation is performed during
video recording, that operation sound may be recorded.
• The lens operation sound (AF and image stabilizer) may be recorded to
video.
• If the operation sound of pressing the video rec. button to end recording
bothers you, try the following:
– Record the video about 3 seconds longer, and then divide the last part of
the video using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] menu.
– Use the shutter remote control function (389) for recording.
• Depending on the type of card, the card access indication may appear for a
while after video recording. This is not a malfunction.
241
10. Recording Videos
• Even when playback is performed on a supported device, situations may
occur where image or sound quality is poor, recording information is not
displayed correctly, or playback is not possible, for example.
If you experience any of these, play them back on the camera.
• If the camera temperature rises, [
] may be displayed and recording may
stop. Wait until the camera cools down.
• When the following functions are being used, the recording mode during
video recording is set to “Low Light Mode”:
– [Clear Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot], [Clear
Night Portrait] ([
] mode)
• During video recording, it will not be outputted via HDMI.
• Video recording is not possible while you are using the following functions:
– [Glistening Water], [Glittering Illuminations], [Soft Image of a Flower]
([
] mode)
– [Rough Monochrome], [Silky Monochrome], [Soft Focus], [Star Filter],
[Sunshine] ([
] mode)
– [Post Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Live View Composite]
• You can display the frame on the recording screen that indicates the angle
of view that will be achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing:
[
] [ ] [Frame Marker] (268)
• It can be indicated as the angle of view when recording video:
[
] [ ] [Rec Area] (346)
242
10. Recording Videos
Taking pictures while a video is being recorded
Press the shutter button fully
during the video recording.
• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed
while recording pictures.
• Recording with the Touch Shutter function is
also available.
243
10. Recording Videos
Setting the video priority or picture priority mode
[ ] Select [Picture Mode in Rec.]
[Video Priority]
• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by
the [Rec Quality] setting for videos.
• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to
[
], [ ], or [ ]. (When set to [ ], still pictures will
be recorded in [Quality] of [
].)
• Up to 40 still pictures can be recorded during the recording
of a video. (A video with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to
10 pictures)
[Photo Priority]
• Pictures will be recorded with the set [Quality] and image
size of [Picture Size].
• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still
picture will be recorded in the video during that period, and
audio is not recorded.
• Up to 10 still pictures can be recorded during recording of
the video.
(A video with a [Rec Quality] size of [4K]: up to 5 pictures)
• The aspect ratio of a still picture is fixed to [16:9].
• When the following functions are in use, simultaneous recording is not
available.
– Videos with the frame rate under [Rec Quality] set to [24p] (when [
]
([Photo Priority]) is set)
– [4K PHOTO] (when [
] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture]) (when [
] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
– [Snap Movie]
244
10. Recording Videos
Creative Video Mode
It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO
sensitivity and record videos.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the exposure mode.
● [ ] [Exposure Mode]
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
• You can perform the same exposure
operations as the [
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
modes.
• Program Shift does not work.
3
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
245
10. Recording Videos
4
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button
.
5
Stop recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button again.
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
246
10. Recording Videos
Operations During Video Recording
Change the exposure and audio settings with touch operation to prevent
operation sounds from being recorded.
Touch [ ].
Touch an icon.
Zoom
(When using an
interchangeable lens
supporting power
zoom)
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Exposure
compensation
ISO sensitivity
Sound recording
level adjustment
(When [Sound Rec
Level Adj.] is set to
[MANUAL].)
Drag the slide bar to set the item.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[
]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
• If you touch icon , the screen of Step
is redisplayed.
247
10. Recording Videos
[4K Live Cropping]
By cropping a part of the image from the image displayed in the live view,
it is possible to record FHD video that incorporates panning and zooming
with the camera staying in a fixed position.
• A video will be recorded at [FHD/20M/30p] under [MP4].
Pan Zoom in
• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the time for panning or
zooming.
● [ ] [4K Live Cropping]
[40SEC]/[20SEC]
248
10. Recording Videos
3
Set the cropping start frame.
● Select the range to be cropped and
press
.
Cropping start frame
ResetReset
SetSet
4
Set the cropping end frame.
● Select the range to be cropped and
press
.
Cropping end frame
• To redo the settings for the position and
size of the start frame and the end frame,
press
.
5
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button
.
Elapsed recording time
Set operating time
• When the set operating time has elapsed,
recording automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the
shutter button or video rec. button again.
249
10. Recording Videos
Operations for Setting the Cropping Frame
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Touch Moves the frame.
/
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the frame.
[DISP.] [Reset]
Start frame: Returns the frame position and size to
the default settings.
End frame: Cancels the settings for the position
and size of the frame.
[Set] Confirms the frame position and size.
• The angle of view during recording becomes narrower.
• AF mode switches to [
] ([Face/Eye Detection]). (The Eye Detection
cannot be used.)
• Brightness measurements and focusing are performed within the cropping
frame. To lock the focus point, set [Continuous AF] to [OFF], or set the focus
mode to [MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [
] (multi-metering).
250
10. Recording Videos
Slow & Quick Mode
Records slow-motion videos and quick-motion videos.
• A video will be recorded at [FHD] under [MP4].
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the recording settings.
● [ ]
[S&Q Exposure Mode]/
[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]/
[S&Q Effect]
• For details, refer to page 253.
3
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
251
10. Recording Videos
4
Start recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button
.
5
Stop recording.
● Press the shutter button or video
rec. button again.
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
252
10. Recording Videos
Operations During Video Recording
You can change settings like exposure with touch operation.
Touch [ ].
Touch an icon.
Zoom
(When using an
interchangeable lens
supporting power zoom)
Aperture value
Shutter speed
Exposure
compensation
ISO sensitivity
S&Q Effect
*
1
*
1 This cannot be operated during
recording.
Drag the slide bar to set the item.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting slowly.
[
]/[ ]: Changes the setting quickly.
• If you touch icon , the screen of Step
is redisplayed.
• Audio is not recorded in videos.
253
10. Recording Videos
Slow & Quick Menu
[S&Q Exposure Mode]
Select the exposure mode.
Settings: [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
• You can perform the same exposure operations as the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] modes.
• Program Shift does not work.
[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]
Select the recording frame rate.
Settings: [60p]/[30p]
254
10. Recording Videos
[S&Q Effect]
Select the speed effect.
[8xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about 8-times
speed.
Example:
When set to [60p]: 8 frames/second.
When set to [30p]: 4 frames/second.
Quick motion
video
[4xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about 4-times
speed.
[2xQUICK]
Records videos sped up to about 2-times
speed.
[2xSLOW]
*
1
Records videos slowed down to about half
speed.
Slow motion
video
[4xSLOW]
*
2
Records videos slowed down to about 1/4
speed.
*
1 When [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [60p], the angle of view becomes
narrower.
*
2 It can only be selected when [S&Q Recording Frame Rate] is set to [30p].
(The angle of view becomes narrower.)
• Depending on the settings, the recording screen may seem as if frames are
missed.
• When the recording time of a single session exceeds the following duration,
recording stops.
– Quick motion video: 29 minutes and 50 seconds
(Example: If you record for 29 minutes and 50 seconds with [8xQUICK],
the result will be a video that is approximately 4 minutes long.)
– Slow motion video: 10 minutes
(Example: If you record for 10 minutes with [4xSLOW], the result will be a
video that is approximately 40 minutes long.)
• The shutter speeds that can be set vary depending on [S&Q Recording
Frame Rate], [S&Q Effect], and the focus mode.
255
10. Recording Videos
Snap Movies
You can specify the recording time in advance and record videos casually
like you take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at
the start of recording and add fade in/out effects in advance.
• Video will be recorded with [FHD/20M/30p] in [MP4].
1
Set the camera to [Snap
Movie].
● [ ] [Snap Movie] [ON]
2
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
3
Start recording.
● Press the video rec. button.
256
10. Recording Videos
Elapsed recording time
Set recording time
• Immediately release the video rec. button
after pressing it.
• You cannot stop video recording in
the middle. The recording will stop
automatically when the set recording time
has elapsed.
Changing the settings
[ ] [Snap Movie] Select [SET]
[Record time] Sets the recording time of videos.
[Pull Focus]
Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually
at the start of recording. (257)
[Fade]
Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image
and audio as recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual
disappearance) effect to them as recording ends.
[WHITE-IN] / [WHITE-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.
[BLACK-IN] / [BLACK-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.
[COLOR-IN] / [COLOR-OUT]:
Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to color or an
effect that fades out from color to black-and-white. Audio will be
recorded normally.
[OFF]
257
10. Recording Videos
• Videos recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white
or all-black thumbnails in Playback Mode.
• If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] in [Custom] ([Operation])
menu (293), you can display a screen that lets you switch [Snap Movie]
between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button. If you press
[DISP.] while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap
Movie.
• [Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi with [Remote
Shooting & View].
• When the following functions are being used, [Snap Movie] is not available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Miniature Effect] ([
] mode)
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [4K Live Cropping]
Setting up [Pull Focus]
Set the frames that specify the positions
where the [Pull Focus] starts (first position)
and stops (second position).
Touch operation
Touch a subject (first position), drag your
finger to the desired location (second
position), and release the finger.
• To cancel the frame settings, touch [ ].
258
10. Recording Videos
Button operation
Press [ ] ( )
Press to move the frame, and press (First position)
• If you press [DISP.] before pressing , the frame will return to the center.
Repeat step (Second position)
• To cancel the frame settings, press .
• A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus
between the start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the
background to foreground, or vice versa.
• After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the
camera constant.
• When the camera fails to set the frame, it returns to the first position.
• When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]
– AF Mode will be switched to [
], a setting specially designed for [Pull
Focus].
– If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [
] will take place at the
first frame position.
• When [Metering Mode] is set to [
] (Spot), the spot metering target is fixed
at the start position (first position) of [Pull Focus].
• When the following functions are being used, [Pull Focus] is not available:
– Manual Focus
– [Digital Zoom]
259
10. Recording Videos
Video Settings (Auto Focus)
This section describes the use of AF when recording videos.
• In “6. Focus/Zoom”, the functions described work with both pictures and
video. Please also refer to those sections.
– Selecting the Focus Mode: 124
– Selecting the AF Mode: 129
– Moving the AF Area by Touch: 142
– Record Using Manual Focus: 146
– Recording with Zoom: 151
[Continuous AF]
You can select how to set the focus in AF when recording videos.
[ ] Select [Continuous AF]
[ON]
Allow the focus to constantly adjust automatically while recording
video.
[OFF] The camera maintains the focus point at the start of recording.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, the AF operation sound
may be recorded during video recording.
If the operation sound bothers you, we recommend recording with
[Continuous AF] set to [OFF].
• If the zoom is operated while recording videos, the subject may take a while
to come into focus.
• When the following functions are being used, [Continuous AF] does not
work:
– [Pull Focus] ([Snap Movie])
– [4K Live Cropping]
260
10. Recording Videos
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video recording using
[Continuous AF].
[ ] Select [AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[ON] Enables the following settings.
[OFF] Disables the following settings.
[SET]
[AF Speed]
[+] side: Focus moves at a faster speed.
[–] side: Focus moves at a slower speed.
[AF Sensitivity]
[+] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera immediately readjusts the
focus.
[–] side: When the distance to the subject changes
significantly, the camera waits for a little before
readjusting the focus.
261
10. Recording Videos
Video Settings (Brightness)
This section describes the brightness settings used during video
recording.
• In “8. Brightness (Exposure)/Coloring/Picture effect”, the functions
described work with both pictures and video.
Please also refer to those sections.
– [Metering Mode]: 207
– Exposure Compensation: 208
– Locking Focus and Exposure (AF/AE Lock): 210
– ISO Sensitivity: 212
– White Balance (WB): 215
– [Photo Style]: 221
– [Filter Settings]: 224
[Luminance Level]
You can set the luminance range to suit the purpose of video recording.
[ ] Select [Luminance Level]
Settings: [0-255]/[16-255]
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this is fixed to [0-255].
262
10. Recording Videos
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity when ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
[ ] Select [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
Sets the lower limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set in the range between [200] and [3200].
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
Sets the upper limit for ISO sensitivity when ISO
sensitivity is [AUTO].
• Set to [AUTO] or in the range between [400] and
[6400].
263
10. Recording Videos
Video Settings (Audio)
Explains the audio setting during video recording.
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
The sound recording level is displayed on
the recording screen.
[ ] Select [Sound Rec Level
Disp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
Sets the sound recording level.
[ ] Select [Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[AUTO]
Automatically adjusts the audio input level to smooth out the
loudness of sounds.
[MANUAL]
Manually adjusts the audio input level.
Settings: [MUTE], [-12dB] to [+6dB]
• When set to [MUTE], this mutes the audio input.
– [
] is displayed in the recording screen.
– Audio input from an external microphone will also be in mute.
• You cannot select [AUTO] when an external microphone is connected.
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
264
10. Recording Videos
[Wind Noise Canceller]
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while
maintaining sound quality.
[ ] Select [Wind Noise Canceller]
[HIGH]
This effectively reduces the wind noise by reducing the low-
pitched sound when a strong wind is detected.
[STANDARD]
This reduces wind noise without loss of sound quality by filtering
out only wind noise.
[OFF] —
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
(450)
[Lens Noise Cut]
You can reduce the zoom sound produced during video recording when
you are using interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.
[ ] Select [Lens Noise Cut]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during
normal operation.
265
10. Recording Videos
[Built-in Mic]
Sets the sound pickup range when using the built-in microphone.
[ ] Select [Built-in Mic]
Setting Sound pickup range
[AUTO]
When the AF mode is set to [
] ([Face/Eye Detection])
and the camera recognizes a face, it switches to
[
] ([TRACKING])
*
1
. In other cases, it is set to [ ]
([SURROUND]).
[SURROUND] Picks up a wide range of sounds in all directions.
[FRONT] Picks up sounds in front of the camera.
[TRACKING]
*
1
When AF mode is set to [ ] ([Face/Eye Detection]) and
the camera recognizes a face, it automatically adjusts the
sound pickup range according to the location of your face.
In other cases, it automatically adjusts the sound pickup
range according to the angle of view.
[BACK] Picks up sounds behind the camera.
*
1 If you hold the camera vertically, the setting will temporarily switch to [ ]
([FRONT]).
• In Self Shot Mode, you can set the sound pickup range by touching the
[
] on the screen. (This does not work with [Built-in Mic] of the video
menu.) (86)
• When an external microphone is connected, [Built-in Mic] is not available.
• You can switch whether or not to display sound pickup range of the built-in
mic on the recording screen:
[
] [Built-in Mic Indicator] (266)
266
10. Recording Videos
[Built-in Mic Indicator]
Displays the sound pickup range and
sound pickup target for the built-in
microphone.
[ ] Select [Built-in Mic Indicator]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Sound pickup range
Sound pickup target
*
1
*
1 When the [Built-in Mic] is in [ ] ([AUTO]) or [ ] ([TRACKING]), and a face is
recognized by [
] ([Face/Eye Detection]), the camera automatically displays the
sound pickup target according to the state of the subject.
• When an external microphone is connected, [Built-in Mic Indicator] is not
available.
267
10. Recording Videos
Video Settings (Display)
This section describes the main assist functions that are convenient when
recording.
• The [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu has display assist functions such
as the center marker. For details, refer to page 340.
[Zebra Pattern]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed with
stripes.
You can also set the benchmark value and the breadth of the range
so that the stripes are displayed on parts that are within the range of
brightness you specify.
[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]
[ ] [ ] Select [Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed
with [ZEBRA1] stripes.
[ZEBRA2]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are displayed
with [ZEBRA2] stripes.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Zebra 1] 50% to 105%
Sets the benchmark
brightness.
[Zebra 2] [OFF]/50% to 105%
268
10. Recording Videos
[Frame Marker]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the recording screen.
This allows you to see during recording the angle of view that will be
achieved with trimming (cropping) in post-processing.
[ ] [ ] Select [Frame Marker]
[ON] Displays video grid lines on the recording screen.
[OFF] —
[SET]
[Frame Aspect]
Sets the aspect ratio of video grid lines.
[2.39:1]/[2.35:1]/[2.00:1]/[1.85:1]/[16:9]/[4:3]/
[5:4]/[1:1]/[4:5]/[9:16]
[Frame Color] Sets the color of video grid lines.
[Frame Mask]
Sets the outer side opacity of video grid lines.
[100%]/[75%]/[50%]/[25%]/[OFF]
269
10. Recording Videos
Log Recording
Setting [Photo Style] to [V-Log L] enables Log recording.
Images finished with rich gradation can be created through post
production processing.
[ ]/[ ] [Photo Style] Select [V-Log L]
• This camera records videos in 4:2:0/8 bit, so after post-production editing,
luminance and color unevenness or noise may appear in areas such as blue
skies, people’s skin, and white walls. It is recommended to perform a test
shot before hand and check the video after post production processing.
• Post-production processing is enabled by utilizing LUT (Look-Up Table).
You can download LUT data from the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/index3.html
(English only)
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], the recording screen and images
output via HDMI will darken. (During video recording, it will not be outputted
via HDMI.)
270
11. Playing Back and Editing of
Images
This chapter explains how to play back and delete pictures and videos.
It also explains editing images.
• Images recorded on devices other than this one may not be played back or
edited correctly on this camera.
• For [Playback] menu items not listed here, refer to “[Playback] Menu”
beginning on page 360.
Playing Back Pictures
1
Display the playback screen.
● Press [ ].
2
Select a picture.
● Select the pictures by pressing
.
● You can move continuously through
images by pressing and holding
.
● You can also select by rotating .
● You can also move through images by dragging the screen
horizontally. By leaving your finger touching the left or right
edge of the screen after dragging to change the image, you can
continuously move through images.
271
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
3
Stop playback.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● You can also stop playback by
pressing [
].
272
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Playing Back Videos
1
Display the playback screen.
● Press [ ].
2
Select a video.
• For information about how to select
images, refer to page 270.
• The [
] video icon is displayed for a
video.
Video recording time
• The video recording time is displayed on
the screen.
3
Play back the video.
Elapsed playback time
● Press .
● You can also start playback by
touching [
] at the center of the
screen.
• Videos recorded with [Snap Movie] are
played back automatically.
4
Stop playback.
● Press .
273
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Operations During Video Playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
Plays/pauses.
Stops.
Performs fast-rewind playback.
• If you press
again, the fast-rewind speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame rewinding (while paused).
Performs fast-forward playback.
• If you press
again, the fast-forward speed
increases.
Performs frame-by-frame forwarding (while
paused).
Extracts a picture (while paused). (274)
Reduces the volume.
Increases the volume.
Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback
Playback from the beginning
Returning to the previous picture
Scrolling to the next picture
• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.
• The camera can play back videos in an MP4 format.
• To play back videos on a PC, use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.
274
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Extracting a Picture
Extract one frame of a video and save it as a JPEG image.
1
Pause playback at the position
you wish to extract a picture.
● Press .
• To fine-adjust the position, press
(rewind frame-by-frame or forward frame-
by-frame).
2
Save the picture.
● Press .
● You can also save the picture by
touching [
].
• The picture created from a video is saved with a [ ] picture quality.
The picture is saved with a size according to the resolution of the [Picture
Size].
• The image quality of a picture created from a video may be coarser than
normal.
• [
] is displayed on the detailed information display screen for a picture
created from a video.
275
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Switching the Display Mode
You can use features to do things like enlarge recorded images for display
and switch to thumbnail display to display multiple images at once (multi-
playback). You can also switch to calendar display to show images of a
selected recording date.
Enlarged Display
Playback images can be displayed enlarged (Playback Zoom).
Enlarging the playback screen.
● Rotate to the right.
● The playback screen is enlarged in the
order of 2x
4x 8x 16x.
• Rotating to the left returns to the previous
display size.
• Pictures taken with [Quality] set to [
] cannot
be displayed enlarged at 16x.
Operations During Enlarged Display
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
—
Pinch out/
pinch in
Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
— Enlarges/reduces the screen.
Drag Moves the enlarged display position.
—
Forwards or rewinds images while maintaining the
same zoom magnification and zoom position.
276
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Thumbnail Screen
1
Switch to thumbnail display.
● Rotate to the left.
● The display is switched in the order
of 12-image screen
30-image
screen.
• Rotating to the left during 30-image
screen display switches to calendar
display. (277)
• Rotating
to the right returns to the
previous display.
• You can also switch the display by
touching an icon.
[
]: 1-image screen
[
]: 12-image screen
[
]: 30-image screen
[
]: Calendar
2
Select an image.
● Press to select an image and then press .
• You can scroll the screen by dragging the thumbnail display up or down.
• Images indicated with [ ] cannot be played back.
277
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Calendar Playback
1
Switch to calendar playback.
● Rotate to the left.
● The display is switched in the order
of thumbnail screen (12 images)
Thumbnail screen (30 images)
Calendar playback.
• Rotating to the right returns to the
previous display.
2020
12
SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
54321
121110987
191817161514
262524232221
29
30 3128
6
13
20
27
2
Select the recording date.
● Press to select a date and then press .
3
Select an image.
● Press to select an image
and then press
.
• Rotating to the left returns to calendar
playback.
• The range that the calendar can be displayed is January 2000 to December
2099.
• Pictures taken with destination settings made in [World Time] are displayed
in the calendar screen using the appropriate date for the destination’s time
zone.
278
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Group Images
Images recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion Animation
recording are handled as group images in the camera, and can be deleted
and edited on a group basis.
You can also delete and edit each image in a group individually.
Images Handled as Group Images by the Camera
Group images saved with [4K PHOTO
Bulk Saving].
Group images recorded with Focus
Bracket.
Group images recorded with Time
Lapse Shot.
Group images recorded with Stop
Motion Animation recording.
15 pic.15 pic.
Playing the Images in a Group One by One
Operations such as displaying thumbnails and deleting images are
available with images in groups just as with normal playback.
Select the group image in the playback state. (270)
Press to display the images in the group.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the group image icon.
Press to select an image.
• To return to the normal playback screen, press or touch [ ] again.
279
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Deleting Images
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted. Carefully confirm
the images before deletion.
• If you delete a group image, all images in the group are deleted.
[Delete Single]
Press [ ] in playback state.
Press to select [Delete Single] and
then press
.
[Delete Multi]
Press [ ] in playback state.
Press to select [Delete Multi] and
then press
.
1
Press to select the image to
delete and then press
.
• [
] is displayed for the selected
image.
• If you press
again, the selection is
canceled.
• Up to 100 images can be selected.
2
Press [DISP.] to delete the selected
image.
OKOK
• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may take some time
to delete them.
• You can set which of [Yes] and [No] is selected initially in the confirmation
screen when deleting:
[
] [Delete Confirmation] (369)
• You can delete all of the images on a card, or all images except those with
a rating set:
[
] [Delete All Images] (369)
280
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Light Composition]
Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish to combine.
Parts of the image that are brighter than the preceding frame will be
superimposed on the preceding frame to combine the frames into one
picture.
1
Select [Light Composition].
● [ ] [Light Composition]
2
Select the 4K burst file.
● Press to select an image and
then press
.
3
Select the combining method.
● Press to select the combining method and then press .
281
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Composite Merging]: Selecting frames to combine
Drag the slide bar or use
to select the frames to combine.
Press .
• The selected frames are remembered,
and the display goes to the preview
screen.
• Use
to select items and
press
to perform the following
operations.
– [Next]: Lets you select more frames
for combining.
– [Reselect]: Discards the frame
selected immediately
before and lets you
select a different image.
Repeat steps - to select more frames to combine (up to 40
frames).
Press to select [Save], and then press .
[Range Merging]: Selecting a range to combine
Select the frame of the first picture and then press .
• The selection method is the same as in step of [Composite Merging]
setting.
Select the frame of the last picture and then press .
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information)
of the first frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are
also registered.
282
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Sequence Composition]
Select multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a sequence
composition of a moving subject into one picture.
1
Select [Sequence
Composition].
● [ ] [Sequence
Composition]
2
Select the 4K burst file.
● Press to select an image and
then press
.
3
Select frames to combine.
Select the frames so that the moving subject will not overlap on the
preceding or subsequent frames. (The sequence composition may
not be created properly if the subject overlaps.)
283
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Drag the slide bar or use
to select the frames to combine.
Press .
• The selected frames are remembered,
and the display goes to the preview
screen.
• Use
to select items and
press
to perform the following
operations.
– [Next]: Lets you select more frames
for combining.
– [Reselect]: Discards the frame
selected immediately
before and lets you
select a different image.
Repeat steps - to select more frames to combine (from 3 to
40 frames).
Press to select [Save], and then press .
• We recommend using a tripod to take pictures for [Sequence Composition].
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information)
of the first frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are
also registered.
284
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Clear Retouch]
You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken.
• The erasure operation can only be
performed by touching. [Clear Retouch]
automatically enables the touch
operation.
1
Select [Clear Retouch].
● [ ] [Clear Retouch]
2
Select a picture.
● Press to select a picture and
then press
.
3
Drag your finger over the part you want to erase.
● The parts to be erased are colored.
● Touching [Undo] will return the colored part back to its previous
state.
4
Touch [Set].
5
Save the image.
● Touch [Save] or press .
285
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Erasing details (enlarging the display)
Touch [SCALING]
• On the touch screen, pinch out your
two fingers to zoom in, and pinch in
your two fingers to zoom out.
• Dragging the screen allows you to
move the enlarged part.
Touch [REMOVE]
• This will bring you back to the
operation of dragging your finger
over the part you want to erase.
The part you want to erase can be
dragged even while the picture is
enlarged.
UndoUndo
SetSet
SCALINGSCALING
REMOVE
REMOVE
• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is
artificially created.
• Edit group pictures one by one.
• When the following functions are being used, [Clear Retouch] is not
available:
– When the viewfinder is in use.
– HDMI output
• [Clear Retouch] is not available for images recorded using the following
functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
] ([Quality])
286
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[RAW Processing]
This processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and saves
them in JPEG format.
1
Select [RAW Processing].
● [ ] [RAW Processing]
2
Select the RAW image.
● Press to select an image and
then press
.
• When selecting an image from group
images, press
and then select an
image in the group. Press
again to
return to the normal selection screen.
• The settings from the time of recording
are reflected in displayed images.
SetSet
3
Select a setting item.
● Press to select an item and
then press
.
287
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
4
Change the setting.
● Rotate or .
• The image can be enlarged/reduced by
pinching out/pinching in the screen.
-2 -1 0 +1 +2
5
Confirm the setting.
● Press .
● The screen of Step 3 reappears.
To set another item, repeat Steps
3 to 5.
6
Save the image.
● Press to select [Begin
Processing] and then press
.
Setting Items ([RAW Processing])
[Begin Processing] Saves the image.
[White Balance]
Selects and adjusts the white balance.
Selecting the item with [
] enables processing with the
same setting as at the time of recording.
• If you press
in the [White Balance] selection screen,
the white balance adjustment screen appears.
• If you press
while [ ] to [ ] is selected, the
color temperature setting screen appears.
[Brightness
correction]
Corrects the brightness.
• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the
effect of exposure compensation during recording.
288
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Photo Style]
Selects a Photo Style.
• You cannot select a Photo Style for images recorded
with [V-Log L]. You cannot select [V-Log L] for images
not recorded with [V-Log L].
[i.Dynamic] Selects the setting of [i.Dynamic].
[Contrast] Adjusts the contrast.
[Highlight] Adjusts the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Adjusts the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]
*
1
/
[Color Tone]
*
2
Adjusts the saturation or color tone.
[Filter Effect]
*
2
Selects filter effects.
[Grain Effect]
*
2
Selects a grain effect setting.
[Noise Reduction] Sets noise reduction.
[i.Resolution] You can select the [i.Resolution] settings.
[Sharpness] Adjusts the sharpness.
[More Settings]
[Reinstate Adjustments]: Returns the settings to the
ones from the time of recording.
[Color Space]: Selects a Color Space setting from
[sRGB] or [AdobeRGB].
[Picture Size]: Selects the size for storing images.
*
1 Available when items other than [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], [L.Monochrome
D] or [V-Log L] are selected in [Photo Style].
*
2 Available when [Monochrome], [L.Monochrome], or [L.Monochrome D] is selected
in [Photo Style].
289
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
Displaying a Comparison Screen
You can change a setting while checking the effect by displaying images
with the applied setting value side by side.
Press [DISP.] in the screen of Step 4.
• The image with the current setting is
displayed at the center.
• Touching the image with the current setting
enlarges it.
Touching [
] returns to the original
display.
• If you have selected [Noise Reduction],
[i.Resolution], or [Sharpness], the
comparison screen is not displayed.
Rotate or to change the setting.
Press to confirm the setting.
• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [L] size
of [4:3].
With this function, images are processed with the aspect ratio and the angle
of view of [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec]) from the time of recording.
• The [White Balance] item is fixed to the setting from the time of recording for
pictures recorded with multiple exposures.
• The results of RAW processing with this function and with the “SILKYPIX
Developer Studio” software do not completely match.
• [RAW Processing] is not available while using the HDMI output.
290
11. Playing Back and Editing of Images
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video or 4K burst file into two.
• Images cannot be returned to their original state once they have been
divided. Carefully confirm the images before performing the divide operation.
• Do not remove the card or battery from the camera during the divide
process. The images may be lost.
1
Select [Video Divide].
● [ ] [Video Divide]
2
Select and play the image.
● Press to select an image and
then press
.
• You can also select by rotating or .
SetSet
3
Pause playback at the position
you wish to divide.
● Press .
• To fine-adjust the position, press
(frame-by-frame rewind or frame-by-
frame forward).
4
Divide the video.
● Press .
• Dividing the video at a point close to the start or end may not be possible.
• Videos with a short recording time cannot be divided.
291
12. Camera Customization
This chapter describes the customization function with which you can
configure the camera to your preferred settings.
Change how buttons, dials, etc. on the camera are to be operated.
[Fn Button Set]
292
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
297
Register the currently set information of the camera.
Custom mode
303
Change menu display items.
Quick menu
299
My Menu
305
• Detailed settings for camera operations and screen display are available in
the [Custom] menu. (331)
292
12. Camera Customization
Fn Buttons
You can register functions to the Fn (Function) buttons.
Different functions can be set for both during recording and playback.
Fn Button Default Settings
134
25
Fn buttons [Setting in REC mode] [Setting in PLAY mode]
1
[Fn1] [Exposure Comp.] [Wi-Fi]
2
[Fn2] [Q.MENU]
• Cannot be used as Fn buttons
during playback.
3
[Fn3] [LVF/Monitor Switch] [LVF/Monitor Switch]
4
[Fn4] [OFF] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
5
[Fn5] [Wi-Fi]
• Cannot be used as Fn buttons
during playback.
[Fn6] [Preview]
[Fn7] [Level Gauge]
[Fn8] [Histogram]
[Fn9] [Built-in Mic]
293
12. Camera Customization
Register Functions to the Fn Buttons
1
Select [Fn Button Set].
● [ ] [ ] [Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in
PLAY mode]
2
Select the button.
● Press to select the button and
then press
.
● Selection is also possible by
rotating
or .
3
Register the function.
● Press to select a function and
then press
.
● Selection is also possible by
rotating
or .
• You can also touch [ ] on the monitor recording information screen
(63) to display the screen in Step
2.
• You can also press and hold the Fn button (2 sec.) to display the screen in
Step
3.
(This may not be displayed depending on the registered function and on the
button type.)
294
12. Camera Customization
Functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in REC mode]
[4K Photo Mode]
162
[Exposure Comp.]
208
[Wi-Fi]
380
[Q.MENU]
61
[Video Record]
238
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
56
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]
345
[AF/AE LOCK]
210
[AF-ON]
211
[Preview]
104
[One Push AE]
• Sets the aperture value and shutter
speed according to the proper
exposure determined by the camera.
[Touch AE]
69
[Level Gauge]
59
[Focus Area Set]
• Displays the AF area/MF Assist
transition screen.
[Zoom Control]
153
[Operation Lock]
• Disables the operations that were
set using [Operation Lock Setting] in
the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
[Focus Ring Lock]
339
[Dial Operation Switch]
298
[Photo Style]
221
[Filter Effect]
224
[Aspect Ratio]
117
[Picture Size]
118
[Quality]
119
[Metering Mode]
207
[Burst Rate]
321
[Self Timer]
184
[Live View Composite]
101
[Bracket]
195
[Focus Mode]
124
[Highlight Shadow]
316
[i.Dynamic]
317
[i.Resolution]
317
[Min. Shtr Speed]
319
[HDR]
323
[Shutter Type]
202
[Flash Mode]
227
[Flash Adjust.]
231
[Wireless Flash Setup]
234
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
152
[Digital Zoom]
155
[Stabilizer]
204
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
205
[4K Live Cropping]
247
[Snap Movie]
255
[Motion Pic. Rec Quality]
239
[S&Q Effect]
254
[Picture Mode in Rec.]
243
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
263
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
263
[Built-in Mic]
265
295
12. Camera Customization
[Special Mic. Directivity Adjust]
450
[Silent Mode]
201
[Peaking]
342
[Histogram]
343
[Guide Line]
343
[Frame Marker]
268
[Zebra Pattern]
344
[Monochrome Live View]
340
[Constant Preview]
341
[Live View Boost]
341
[Rec Area]
346
[Step Zoom]
156
[Zoom Speed]
156
[Sensitivity]
212
[White Balance]
215
[AF Mode/MF]
129
146
[Drive Mode]
157
[Rec / Playback Switch]
• Switches to the playback screen.
[Off]
• Set when not using as an Fn button.
[Restore to Default]
• Restore the default settings for the
Fn button. (292)
Functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in PLAY mode]
[Wi-Fi]
380
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
56
[Rec / Playback Switch]
• Switches to the recording screen.
[Send Image (Smartphone)]
406
[4K PHOTO Play]
• Displays the screen to select
pictures to save from a 4K burst file.
[Delete Single]
279
[Protect]
362
[Rating★1]
362
[Rating★2]
362
[Rating★3]
362
[Rating★4]
362
[Rating★5]
362
[RAW Processing]
286
[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
175
[Off]
• Set when not using as an Fn button.
[Restore to Default]
• Restore the default settings for the
Fn button. (292)
296
12. Camera Customization
Use the Fn Buttons
During recording, pressing the Fn buttons enables usage of the functions
registered in [Setting in REC mode], and during playback, usage of the
functions registered in [Setting in PLAY mode].
1
Press the Fn button.
2
Select a setting item.
● Press to select a setting item
and then press
.
● Selection is also possible by
rotating
or .
• Display and selection methods of a
setting item differ depending on the menu
item.
Use [Fn5] to [Fn9] (Touch Icons)
During recording, you can use the Fn buttons within the Touch Tab.
Touch [ ].
Touch one of [Fn5] to [Fn9].
297
12. Camera Customization
[Dial Operation Switch]
This temporarily changes the functions operated with (front dial) and
(control dial).
Register Functions to the Dials
1
Select [Dial Operation Switch
Setup].
● [ ] [ ] [Dial Set.]
[Dial Operation Switch Setup]
[
]/[ ]
2
Register the function.
● Press to select a function and
then press
.
● Selection is also possible by
rotating
or .
Functions That Can Be Registered
– [4K Photo Mode] (162)
– [Photo Style] (221)
– [Filter Effect] (224)
– [Aspect Ratio] (117)
– [Focus Mode] (124)
– [Highlight Shadow] (316)
– [i.Dynamic] (317)
– [i.Resolution] (317)
– [Flash Mode] (227)
– [Flash Adjust.] (231)
– [Sensitivity]
*
1
(212)
– [White Balance]
*
2
(215)
– [AF Mode] (129)
– [Drive Mode] (157)
*
1 default setting
*
2 default setting
• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.
298
12. Camera Customization
Temporarily Change Dial Operation
1
Set [Dial Operation Switch] to the Fn button. (292)
2
Switch dial operation.
● Press the Fn button set in Step 1.
● A guide will display the functions
registered to
and .
• If no operations are performed, then
several seconds later, the guide
disappears.
3
Set the registered function.
● Rotate or while the guide is
displayed.
4
Confirm your selection.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
299
12. Camera Customization
Quick Menu Customization
For information about Quick menu operation methods, refer to page 61.
Register to the Quick Menu
Change the menus to be displayed in the Quick menu.
Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.
1
Select [Q.MENU].
● [ ] [ ] [Q.MENU]
[CUSTOM]
2
Close the menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
3
Display the Quick menu.
● Press [Q.MENU].
300
12. Camera Customization
4
Display the editing screen for
the Quick menu.
● Press and select [ ], and
then press
.
5
Register menu items.
● Press to select the menu
item in the top row and press
.
• Items that are displayed in light gray in
the top row have already been set.
1/6
6
Select the item position.
● Press to select the empty
space in the bottom row and press
.
• You can also set the menu item by
dragging it from the top row to the bottom
row.
• If there is no empty space in the bottom
row, you can replace an existing item
with a new select item by selecting the
existing item.
• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom
row by pressing
and select an item to
cancel, and then press
.
● Press the [Q.MENU] to return to the
screen in Step
4.
1/6
Please move to the
desired position
301
12. Camera Customization
7
Close the Quick menu.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
● You can also close the menu by
pressing [Q.MENU].
302
12. Camera Customization
Functions That Can Be Registered
[Photo Style]
221
[Filter Effect]
224
[Picture Setting]
117
118
[Quality]
119
[Metering Mode]
207
[Burst Rate]
321
[4K PHOTO]
162
[Self Timer]
184
[Bracket]
195
[Focus Mode]
124
[i.Dynamic]
317
[i.Resolution]
317
[Min. Shtr Speed]
319
[HDR]
323
[Shutter Type]
202
[Flash Mode]
227
[Flash Adjust.]
231
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
152
[Digital Zoom]
155
[Stabilizer]
205
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
205
[4K Live Cropping]
247
[Snap Movie]
255
[Motion Pic. Rec Quality]
239
[S&Q Effect]
254
[Picture Mode in Rec.]
243
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
263
[Silent Mode]
201
[Peaking]
342
[Histogram]
343
[Guide Line]
343
[Frame Marker]
268
[Zebra Pattern]
344
[Monochrome Live View]
340
[Constant Preview]
341
[Live View Boost]
341
[Rec Area]
346
[Step Zoom]
156
[Zoom Speed]
156
[Sensitivity]
212
[White Balance]
215
[AF Mode]
129
[Drive Mode]
157
303
12. Camera Customization
Custom Mode
Menu settings that match your preferences can be registered in Custom
mode ([C1] to [C3]). You can use registered settings by switching the
custom mode menu to [SET1] to [SET3] modes.
Register in Custom Mode
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
At the time of purchase, the default settings of the [
] mode menus are
registered with all Custom modes.
1
Set to recording mode and menu settings of the state
you wish to save.
2
Select [Cust.Set Mem.].
● [ ] [Cust.Set Mem.]
3
Register.
● Select the save-to number and then
press
.
● The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.
• [My Menu], [Setup] menu, [Playback] menu
• [Custom] menu ([Menu Guide], data registered in [Face Recog.], [Profile Setup]
settings)
304
12. Camera Customization
• You cannot register [ ]/[ ] mode in Custom mode.
Using Custom Mode
Set the mode dial to [ ].
● The last-used Custom mode will be
called up.
Switching the Custom Mode
[ ] [SET1]/[SET2]/[SET3]
• It is also possible to display the selection screen by
touching the recording mode icon in recording screen.
Changing Registered Details
Registered settings do not change even if you change the camera settings
temporarily with the mode dial set to [
].
To change the registered details, overwrite them by using [Cust.Set Mem.]
in the [Setup] menu.
305
12. Camera Customization
My Menu
Register frequently-used menus in My Menu.
A maximum of 23 items can be registered.
Registration in My Menu
1
Select [Add].
● [ ] [My Menu Setting]
[Add]
2
Register.
● Select the menu to register and
then press
.
Calling up My Menu
Call up the menus registered in My Menu.
[ ] Registered menus
306
12. Camera Customization
Edit My Menu
You can reorder the display order of My Menu, and delete unnecessary
menus.
[ ] Select [My Menu Setting]
[Add] Selects and registers the menus to be displayed in My Menu.
[Sorting]
Changes the order of My Menu.
Select the menu to change, then set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes menus that are registered to My Menu.
[Delete Item]: Selects the menu, then deletes.
[Delete All]: Deletes all menus registered in My Menu.
[Display from My
Menu]
Displays My Menu first when displaying a menu.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
307
13. Menu Guide
This chapter provides a list of menus and describes them in detail.
• For information about menu operation methods, refer to page 65.
Search the Menus
List of Menu
308
Learn About the Menu Functions and Default Settings
[Rec] menu
314
[Motion Picture] menu
327
[Custom] menu
331
[Setup] menu
352
[My Menu]
305
[Playback] menu
360
Menus displayed in specific recording modes
[Intelligent Auto] menu
312
[Creative Video] menu
312
[Slow & Quick] menu
313
[Custom Mode] menu
304
[Scene Guide] menu
313
[Creative Control] menu
313
Enter Characters
Entering Characters
370
• For details about “List of Functions That Can Be Set in Each Recording
Mode”, refer to page 488.
308
13. Menu Guide
List of Menu
:
Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
[Intelligent Auto Mode]
312
[iHandheld Night Shot]
312
[iHDR]
312
[Creative Video] menu
[Exposure Mode]
312
[4K Live Cropping]
312
[Slow & Quick] menu
[S&Q Exposure Mode]
313
[S&Q Recording Frame Rate]
313
[S&Q Effect]
313
[Scene Guide] menu
[Scene Switch]
313
[Creative Control] menu
[Filter Effect]
313
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
313
[Aspect Ratio]
314
[Picture Size]
314
[Quality]
314
[Focus Mode]
314
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
314
[Photo Style]
314
[Filter Settings]
314
[Color Space]
315
[Metering Mode]
315
[Highlight Shadow]
316
[i.Dynamic]
317
[i.Resolution]
317
[Flash]
318
[Red-Eye Removal]
319
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
319
[Min. Shtr Speed]
319
[Long Shtr NR]
320
[Shading Comp.]
320
[Diffraction
Compensation]
321
[Stabilizer]
321
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
321
[Digital Zoom]
321
[Burst Rate]
321
[4K PHOTO]
321
[Self Timer]
322
[Time Lapse Shot]
322
[Stop Motion Animation]
322
[Intelligent Auto] menu
[Rec] menu
309
13. Menu Guide
[Live View Composite]
322
[Silent Mode]
322
[Shutter Type]
322
[Shutter Delay]
323
[Bracket]
323
[HDR]
323
[Multi Exp.]
325
[Rec] menu (Continued)
[Rec Quality]
327
[Snap Movie]
327
[Focus Mode]
327
[Continuous AF]
327
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
327
[Photo Style]
327
[Filter Settings]
328
[Luminance Level]
328
[Metering Mode]
328
[Highlight Shadow]
328
[i.Dynamic]
328
[i.Resolution]
328
[ISO Sensitivity (video)]
328
[Diffraction
Compensation]
329
[Stabilizer]
329
[Flkr Decrease]
329
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
329
[Digital Zoom]
329
[Picture Mode in Rec.]
329
[Self Timer]
329
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
329
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
329
[Wind Noise Canceller]/
[Wind Cut]
330
330
[Lens Noise Cut]
330
[Built-in Mic]
330
[Built-in Mic Indicator]
330
[Special Mic.]
330
[Motion Picture] menu
310
13. Menu Guide
[Exposure]
331
[ISO Increments]
331
[Extended ISO]
331
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
331
[Focus / Release Shutter]
331
[AF/AE Lock]
331
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
331
[Shutter AF]
331
[Half Press Release]
331
[Quick AF]
332
[Eye Sensor AF]
332
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
332
[AF Assist Lamp]
333
[Direct Focus Area]
334
[Focus/Release Priority]
334
[Focus Switching for Vert / Hor]
335
[Loop Movement Focus Frame]
335
[AF Area Display]
335
[AF+MF]
336
[MF Assist]
336
[MF Assist Display]
336
[Operation]
337
[Fn Button Set]
337
[ISO Displayed Setting]
337
[Exposure Comp. Disp. Setting]
337
[Q.MENU]
337
[Dial Set.]
338
[Operation Lock Setting]
339
[Focus Ring Lock]
339
[Video Rec. Button]
339
[Touch Settings]
339
[Monitor / Display]
340
[Auto Review]
340
[Monochrome Live View]
340
[Constant Preview]
341
[Live View Boost]
341
[Peaking]
342
[Histogram]
343
[Guide Line]
343
[Frame Marker]
344
[Center Marker]
344
[Highlight]
344
[Zebra Pattern]
344
[Expo.Meter]
345
[MF Guide]
345
[LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
345
[Monitor Info. Disp.]
345
[Rec Area]
346
[Remaining Disp.]
346
[Red REC Frame Indicator]
346
[Menu Guide]
346
[Lens / Others]
347
[Lens Position Resume]
347
[Power Zoom Lens]
347
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
347
[Aperture Ring Increment]
348
[Self Timer Auto Off]
348
[Self Shot]
348
[AF After Countdown]
348
[Face Recog.]
349
[Profile Setup]
351
[Custom] menu
311
13. Menu Guide
[Online Manual]
352
[Cust.Set Mem.]
352
[Clock Set]
352
[World Time]
352
[Travel Date]
353
[Wi-Fi]
353
[Bluetooth]
354
[Wireless Connection Lamp]
354
[Beep]
354
[Economy]
355
[Monitor Display Speed]
355
[LVF Display Speed]
355
[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]
356
[Monitor Luminance]/
[LVF Luminance]
356
[Eye Sensor]
356
[USB Mode]
357
[TV Connection]
357
[Language]
358
[Version Disp.]
358
[Folder / File Settings]
359
[No.Reset]
359
[Reset]
359
[Reset Network Settings]
359
[Pixel Refresh]
359
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
359
[Demo Mode]
359
[Approved Regulations]
359
[Format]
359
[My Menu Setting]
306
[Add]
306
[Sorting]
306
[Delete]
306
[Display from My Menu]
306
[Playback] menu
[Slide Show]
361
[Playback Mode]
361
[Protect]
362
[Rating]
362
[Title Edit]
363
[Face Rec Edit]
364
[RAW Processing]
364
[4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
364
[Light Composition]
364
[Sequence Composition]
364
[Clear Retouch]
364
[Text Stamp]
365
[Resize]
366
[Cropping]
367
[Rotate]
367
[Video Divide]
367
[Time Lapse Video]
368
[Stop Motion Video]
368
[Rotate Disp.]
368
[Picture Sort]
368
[Delete Confirmation]
369
[Delete All Images]
369
[Setup] menu
[My Menu]
312
13. Menu Guide
Menus displayed in specific recording
modes
: Default settings
[Intelligent Auto] menu
[Intelligent Auto
Mode]
[
]/ [ ]
77
Switches between [
] mode and [ ] mode.
[iHandheld Night
Shot]
[ON] /
[OFF]
79
When the camera detects [iHandheld Night Shot],
it records a still picture with less jitter and noise by
combining multiple pictures.
[iHDR]
[ON] /
[OFF]
79
When the camera detects a contrast between
the background and the subject, it records a still
picture rich in gradation by combining multiple
pictures.
[Creative Video] menu
[Exposure Mode]
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
244
Sets the exposure mode to use in [
] mode.
[4K Live Cropping]
[40SEC]/[20SEC]/
[OFF]
247
By cropping a part of the range displayed in the
live view, it is possible to record an FHD video that
incorporates panning and zooming with the camera
staying in a fixed position.
313
13. Menu Guide
[Slow & Quick] menu
[S&Q Exposure
Mode]
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
253
Selects the exposure mode.
[S&Q Recording
Frame Rate]
[60p]/
[30p]
253
Selects the recording frame rate.
[S&Q Effect]
[8xQUICK]/[4xQUICK]/
[2xQUICK]/[2xSLOW]/
[4xSLOW]
254
Select the speed effect.
[Scene Guide] menu
[Scene Switch] Displays the scene selection screen.
105
[Creative Control] menu
[Filter Effect] Displays the selection screen of filter effect.
111
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[ON] /
[OFF]
111
Sets the camera to take a picture with and without
an filter effect simultaneously.
314
13. Menu Guide
[Rec] Menu
:
:
Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
Default settings
[Aspect Ratio]
[4:3]/[3:2]/[16:9]/[1:1]
117
You can select the image aspect ratio.
[Picture Size]
[L]/[M]/[S]
118
Sets the picture’s image size.
[Quality]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
119
Set the compression rate used for storing pictures.
[Focus Mode]
[AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]/[MF]
124
Selects the focusing method (focus mode) to
match subject movement.
[AF
Sensitivity(Photo)]
[+2] to [–2] (
±0)
128
Sets the tracking sensitivity for the movement of
subjects.
[Photo Style]
[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[Scenery]/
[Portrait]/[Custom]/[Cinelike D]/[Cinelike V]/
[V-Log L]
221
You can select the finishing settings of images to
suit your subjects and expression styles.
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [ON]/
[OFF]/[SET]
224
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This mode records with additional image effects
(filters).
315
13. Menu Guide
[Color Space]
[sRGB]/[AdobeRGB]
—
This sets the method for correcting the color
reproduction of the recorded images on the
screens of a PC or on a device such as a printer.
[sRGB]: This is widely used in PCs and similar
devices.
[AdobeRGB]: AdobeRGB is mainly used for
business purposes such as professional printing
because it has a greater range of reproducible
colors than sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with
AdobeRGB.
• When the following functions are being used, the
setting is fixed to [sRGB]:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
[Metering Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
207
Type of optical measurement to measure
brightness can be changed.
316
13. Menu Guide
[Highlight Shadow]
[ ] ([Standard])/
[
] ([Higher contrast])/
[
] ([Lower contrast])/
[
] ([Brighten shadows])/
[
]/[ ]/[ ] (Custom)
—
You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a
picture while confirming the brightness of these
areas on the screen.
• Rotate
to adjust the highlighted areas and
rotate
to adjust the shadowed areas. Press
to confirm the setting.
Highlighted area
Shadowed area
Preview display
– Adjustments can also be made by dragging
the graph.
– To register your preferred settings, press
to
select the registration target icon (Custom 1,
Custom 2, and Custom 3).
• You can press [DISP.] to switch the display.
317
13. Menu Guide
[Highlight Shadow]
(Continued)
• When using [Filter Settings], [Highlight Shadow]
is not available.
• When [Photo Style] is set to [V-Log L], this is
fixed to [
] ([Standard]).
• The settings adjusted in [
], [ ], [ ], or
[
] will be restored to the default settings when
the camera is turned off.
—
[i.Dynamic]
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/
[OFF]
—
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the
brightness difference between the background and
subject is great.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
• This function does not work in the following
case:
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
• When the following functions are being used,
[i.Dynamic] is not available:
– [V-Log L] ([Photo Style])
– [Filter Settings]
– [Live View Composite]
[i.Resolution]
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW] /
[OFF]
—
You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution
technology to record still pictures with sharper
outlines and clearer resolution.
318
13. Menu Guide
[Flash]
[Flash Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
227
Sets the flash mode.
[Flash Synchro]
[1ST]/[2ND]
232
Sets the flash mode to Second Curtain Synchro.
[Flash Adjust.]
[–2 EV] to [+2 EV]
(
[±0 EV])
231
Adjusts the flash output if a picture taken using the
flash is too bright or too dark.
[Auto Exposure
Comp.]
[ON]/
[OFF]
233
Automatically adjust the flash output in conjunction
with the exposure compensation value.
[Wireless] [ON]/
[OFF]
235
Enables recording using a wireless flash.
[Wireless Channel]
[1CH]/[2CH]/[3CH]/[4CH]
235
Sets the channel to use when recording with a
wireless flash.
[Communication
Light]
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/
[LOW]
237
Set the strength of communication light.
[Wireless Setup] [External Flash]
236
[A Group]/[B Group]/
[C Group]
Sets details for wireless flash recording.
319
13. Menu Guide
[Red-Eye Removal]
[ON]/
[OFF]
233
When [Flash Mode] is set to [
] or [ ], the
camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects
image data.
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
[200] to [12800]
—
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
[AUTO]/[400] to [25600]
You can set the upper limit of ISO sensitivity when
ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [
].
• When the following functions are being used,
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)] is not available:
– [Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm
Glowing Nightscape], [Handheld Night Shot]
([
] mode)
[Min. Shtr Speed]
[AUTO]/[1/16000] to [1/1]
—
Sets the minimum value for the shutter speed to be
used when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or
[
].
• The shutter speed may become slower than the
set value in recording situations where correct
exposure cannot be achieved.
320
13. Menu Guide
[Long Shtr NR]
[ON]/[OFF]
—
The camera automatically removes noise
generated when recording images with a slow
shutter speed.
• Recording is not possible during noise reduction.
• When the following functions are being used,
[Long Shtr NR] is not available:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [ESHTR]
– [Silent Mode]
[Shading Comp.]
[ON]/
[OFF]
—
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of
the lens characteristics, you can record pictures
with the brightness of the screen periphery
corrected.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand
out with higher ISO sensitivity.
• When the following functions are being used,
[Shading Comp.] is not available:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– Taking still pictures while a video is being
recorded (when [
] ([Video Priority]) is set)
– [Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
– [Digital Zoom]
321
13. Menu Guide
[Diffraction
Compensation]
[AUTO]/
[OFF]
—
The camera raises the image resolution by
correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction
when the aperture is closed.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved
depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
204
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[HIGH]/
[STANDARD]/
[OFF]
Configures image stabilizer settings.
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Rec])
[ZOOM]/[TELE CONV.]/
[OFF]
152
You can take pictures that are further enlarged
beyond what is available with the optical zoom,
without any deterioration in image quality.
[Digital Zoom]
[2x]/
[OFF]
155
You can zoom in up to 2x the original zoom
magnification.
[Burst Rate]
[H]/[M]/[L]
158
Sets the burst recording operation.
[4K PHOTO]
[Rec Method] [4K Burst (Wide-angle)]
(In Self Shot Mode)/
[4K Burst]/[4K Burst(S/S)]/
[4K Pre-Burst]
162
[Pre-Burst Recording] [ON]/
[OFF]
Sets 4K photos.
You can save pictures extracted from a burst file
taken using high-speed burst.
322
13. Menu Guide
[Self Timer]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc.
185
[SET] 2 sec. to 10 sec. (
3 sec.)
Sets the self-timer duration.
[Time Lapse Shot]
[Start]
187
[Shooting Interval
Setting]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Start Time]
[Now]/[Start Time Set]
[Image Count]
[Shooting Interval]
Starts/stops recording automatically at a set
recording interval.
[Stop Motion
Animation]
[Start]
190
[Auto Shooting] [ON]/
[OFF]
[Shooting Interval]
Enables you to take pictures while moving the
subject little by little.
[Live View
Composite]
[Start]
101
[Shutter Delay] [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/
[1SEC]/
[OFF]
The camera records images at set exposure time
intervals, and combines parts with changes in
bright light to save the result as one picture.
[Silent Mode]
[ON]/
[OFF]
201
Disables all operation sounds and light output at
once.
[Shutter Type]
[AUTO]/[EFC]/[ESHTR]
202
Selects the shutter type to use for taking pictures.
323
13. Menu Guide
[Shutter Delay]
[8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/
[OFF]
—
To reduce camera shake and shutter-induced blur,
the shutter is released after the specified time has
passed since the shutter button was pressed.
• When the following functions are being used,
[Shutter Delay] is not available:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [HDR]
[Bracket]
[Bracket Type]
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/
[OFF]
195
[More Settings]
You can take multiple pictures while automatically
adjusting a setting.
[HDR]
[ON]/
[OFF]
—
[SET] [Dynamic Range]
[Auto Align]
The camera can combine 3 still pictures taken at
different exposures into a single properly exposed
picture with rich gradation. The individual pictures
used to create the HDR picture are not saved. You
can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas
and dark areas when, for example, the contrast
between the background and the subject is large.
A combined HDR picture is saved in JPEG format.
[Dynamic Range]:
[AUTO]: Takes pictures after automatically setting
the adjustment range of the exposure based on the
contrast of a subject.
[±1EV] / [±2EV] / [±3EV]: Takes pictures using the
adjustment range of the exposure being set.
324
13. Menu Guide
[HDR]
(Continued)
[Auto Align]:
[ON]: Automatically adjusts the displacement
of pictures caused by jitter, etc. We recommend
using this setting to take pictures with a handheld
camera.
[OFF]: Does not adjust the displacement of
pictures. We recommend using this setting when
you use a tripod.
• After the shutter button has been pressed, do
not move the camera during the burst operation.
• Since a burst of still pictures are combined
after they have been recorded, it will be a few
moments before you will be able to record
another picture.
• A subject that was in motion when it was
recorded may be recorded as an afterimage.
• When [Auto Align] is set to [ON], the angle of
view narrows slightly.
• When you take pictures using a flash, the flash
mode is fixed to [
] (Forced Flash Off).
• This function will not work for still pictures while
video are being recorded.
• When the following functions are being used,
[HDR] is not available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Filter Settings]
– [Burst]
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Bracket]
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation] (when [Auto
Shooting] is set)
– [Live View Composite]
—
325
13. Menu Guide
[Multi Exp.]
[Start]
—
[Auto Gain]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Overlay] [ON]/
[OFF]
You can apply an effect equivalent to four
exposures on a single image.
[Auto Gain]: Automatically adjusts brightness in
accordance with image count.
[Overlay]: Allows multiple exposure for recorded
RAW images. After selecting [Start], a selection
screen for images to stack is displayed.
• After selecting [Start], pressing the shutter
button fully starts multiple exposure.
• Preview is displayed for each recording, and the
following operations are available:
– [Next] (You can also
perform the same
operation by pressing
the shutter button
halfway.)
– [Retake]
– [Exit]: Records the
picture, and finishes
multiple exposure
recording.
Next
Retake
Exit
326
13. Menu Guide
[Multi Exp.]
(Continued)
• To finish multiple exposure recording before
starting the recording, press [Fn2] on the
recording screen.
• Recording information for the last-recorded
image will be saved as recording information for
images recorded with multiple exposures.
• [Overlay] can be set only for RAW images
recorded with the camera.
• When the following functions are being used,
[Multi Exp.] is not available:
– Self Shot Mode
– [Filter Settings]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Stop Motion Animation]
– [Live View Composite]
– HDMI output
—
327
13. Menu Guide
[Motion Picture] Menu
:
:
Menu items common to the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu.
Their settings are synchronized.
Default settings
[Rec Quality] Sets the video recording image quality.
239
[Snap Movie]
[ON]/
[OFF]
255
[SET] [Record time]
[Pull Focus]
[Fade]
You can specify the recording time in advance and
record videos casually like you take snapshots.
[Focus Mode]
[AFS]/[AFF]/[AFC]/[MF]
124
Selects the focusing method (focus mode) to
match subject movement.
[Continuous AF]
[ON]/[OFF]
259
You can select how to set the focus in AF when
recording videos.
[AF Custom
Setting(Video)]
[ON]/
[OFF]
260
[SET] [AF Speed]/[AF Sensitivity]
You can fine-adjust the focusing method for video
recording using [Continuous AF].
[Photo Style]
[Standard]/[Vivid]/[Natural]/[Monochrome]/
[L.Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome D]/[Scenery]/
[Portrait]/[Custom]/[Cinelike D]/[Cinelike V]/
[V-Log L]
221
You can select the finishing settings of images to
suit your subjects and expression styles.
328
13. Menu Guide
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect] [ON]/
[OFF]/[SET]
224
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This mode records with additional image effects
(filters).
[Luminance Level]
[0-255]/
[16-255]
261
You can set the luminance range to suit the
purpose of video recording.
[Metering Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]
207
Type of optical measurement to measure
brightness can be changed.
[Highlight Shadow]
[ ] ([Standard])/[ ] ([Higher contrast])/
[
] ([Lower contrast])/[ ] ([Brighten shadows])/
[
]/[ ]/[ ] (Custom)
316
You can adjust the highlights and shadows in a
picture while confirming the brightness of these
areas on the screen.
[i.Dynamic]
[AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/
[OFF]
317
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the
brightness difference between the background and
subject is great.
[i.Resolution]
[High]/[Standard]/[Low]/
[OFF]
—
You can use the camera’s Intelligent Resolution
technology to record still pictures with sharper
outlines and a clearer resolution.
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower
Limit Setting]
[200] to [3200]
262
[ISO Auto Upper
Limit Setting]
[AUTO]/[400] to [6400]
Sets the lower and upper limits for ISO sensitivity
when ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO].
329
13. Menu Guide
[Diffraction
Compensation]
[AUTO]/
[OFF]
321
The camera raises the image resolution by
correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction
when the aperture is closed.
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
204
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
[HIGH]/
[STANDARD]/
[OFF]
Configures image stabilizer settings.
[Flkr Decrease]
[1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/
[OFF]
—
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the
flicker or striping in a video.
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
[ON]/
[OFF]
154
Fixes the zoom magnification at the maximum.
[Digital Zoom]
[2x]/
[OFF]
155
You can zoom in up to 2x the original zoom
magnification.
[Picture Mode in
Rec.]
[ ]/[ ]
243
Select which setting to prioritize when taking
pictures while a video is being recorded.
[Self Timer]
[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] etc.
185
[SET] 2 sec. to 10 sec. (
3 sec.)
Sets the self-timer duration.
[Sound Rec Level
Disp.]
[ON]/
[OFF]
263
The sound recording level is displayed on the
recording screen.
[Sound Rec Level
Adj.]
[AUTO]/[MANUAL]
([MUTE], [-12dB] to [+6dB] (
[0dB]))
263
Sets the sound recording level.
330
13. Menu Guide
[Wind Noise
Canceller]
[HIGH]/
[STANDARD]/[OFF]
264
This reduces the wind noise coming into the built-in
microphone while maintaining sound quality.
[Wind Cut]
[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/
[OFF]
450
This reduces wind noise when an external
microphone is connected.
[Lens Noise Cut]
[ON]/[OFF]
264
You can reduce the zoom sound produced
during video recording when you are using
interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom.
[Built-in Mic]
[AUTO]/
[SURROUND]/[FRONT]/[TRACKING]/
[BACK]
265
Sets the sound pickup range when using the built-
in microphone.
[Built-in Mic
Indicator]
[ON]/[OFF]
266
Displays the sound pickup range and sound pickup
target for the built-in microphone.
[Special Mic.]
[STEREO]/[LENS AUTO]/[SHOTGUN]/
[S.SHOTGUN]/[MANUAL]
450
Sets the sound pickup range when the Stereo
Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is
connected.
331
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] Menu
: Default settings
[Custom] menu [Exposure]
[ISO Increments]
[1/3EV]/[1 EV]
Changes the intervals between ISO sensitivity adjustment
values.
[Extended ISO]
[ON]/
[OFF]
Extends the setting range of ISO sensitivity.
[Exposure Comp.
Reset]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This resets the exposure value when you change the
recording mode or turn off the camera.
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK]/[AF LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]
Sets which function is activated when [AF/AE LOCK] is
assigned to an Fn button. (210)
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This sets button operations for AF/AE Lock.
Turning this [ON] maintains the lock after releasing the
button until it is pressed again.
[Shutter AF]
[ON]/[OFF]
This adjusts focus automatically when you press the shutter
button halfway.
[Half Press Release]
[ON]/
[OFF]
You can release the shutter quickly by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
332
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[Quick AF]
[ON]/
[OFF]
When the amount of camera shake becomes small, the
camera will automatically adjust the focus and focus
adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter button is
pressed.
• The battery will drain faster than usual.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In preview mode
– In low light situations
[Eye Sensor AF]
[ON]/
[OFF]
When looking through the viewfinder, if the eye sensor
operates, then AF will function.
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in low light situations.
[Pinpoint AF
Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time] [LONG]/
[MID]/[SHORT]
[Pinpoint AF Display] [FULL]/
[PIP]
Changes enlarged screen settings displayed when AF
mode is [
].
[Pinpoint AF Time]: Sets the time for which the screen is
enlarged when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]: Sets the display method (full screen
mode/windowed mode) of the enlarged screen.
333
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF Assist Lamp]
[ON]/[OFF]
When recording in low light conditions, the AF assist light
turns on when you press the shutter button halfway, making
it easier for the camera to focus.
• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different
depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is
attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may
become harder to focus when a lens with large diameter
is used.
• When the following functions are being used, [AF Assist
Lamp] is fixed to [OFF]:
– [Distinct Scenery], [Bright Blue Sky], [Romantic
Sunset Glow], [Vivid Sunset Glow], [Glistening Water],
[Clear Nightscape], [Cool Night Sky], [Warm Glowing
Nightscape], [Artistic Nightscape], [Handheld Night
Shot] ([
] mode)
– [Silent Mode]
334
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[Direct Focus Area]
[ON]/
[OFF]
Moves the AF area or MF assist using the cursor button
while recording.
• When [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] is selected, you can
move the AF area, when [
] is selected, you can move
the lock start position, and when [
] is selected, you
can move the focus position.
• Perform the setting of functions assigned to the cursor
buttons using the Quick menu (299) or function buttons
(293).
• When the following functions are being used, [Direct
Focus Area] is fixed to [OFF]:
– [Glistening Water] ([
] mode, [ ] mode)
– [4K Live Cropping]
[Focus/Release
Priority]
[AFS]/[AFF]
[FOCUS]/[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
[AFC] [FOCUS]/
[BALANCE]/[RELEASE]
This sets whether to give priority to focus or shutter release
during AF.
[FOCUS]: Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]: Performs recording while controlling the
balance between focusing and shutter release timing.
[RELEASE]: Enables recording even when focus is not
achieved.
335
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[Focus Switching
for Vert / Hor]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This stores separate AF area positions for when the camera
is held vertically and when it is held horizontally. The
camera memorizes two different vertical positions, one with
the camera’s right side facing down and one with the left
side facing down.
• This function works when the AF mode is set to [
],
[
] or [ ].
• In MF, this memorizes the MF Assist position.
[Loop Movement
Focus Frame]
[ON]/
[OFF]
When moving the AF area or MF Assist, this enables its
position to loop from one edge to the other edge of the
screen.
[AF Area Display]
[ON]/[OFF]
You can perform the AF area display setting when the AF
Mode is set to [
] (49-area-focusing) or Custom Multi.
[ON]: Displays the AF area on the recording screen.
• When the default AF area is selected in [
] (49-area-
focusing) or [
], [ ], or [ ] of Custom Multi-
function, the AF area is not displayed.
[OFF]: Displays the AF area on the recording screen for
only a few seconds after the AF area is set.
• When the following functions are being used, even when
it is set to [ON], it has the same operations as [OFF].
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO]
336
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF+MF]
[ON]/
[OFF]
You can fine-adjust the focus manually during AF Lock.
– When focus mode is [AFS], and the shutter button is
pressed halfway
– When locked using the Fn button [AF LOCK] or [AF/AE
LOCK]
[MF Assist]
When an
interchangeable lens
with a focus ring is
attached
[
]/ [ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
When an
interchangeable lens
with no focus ring is
attached
[ON]/[OFF]
This sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged
screen).
[
]: The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by
pressing [
] ( ).
[
]: The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.
[
]: The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ] ( ).
• While you are using the following functions, MF Assist will
not be displayed:
– Video recording
– [4K Pre-Burst]
– [Digital Zoom]
[MF Assist Display]
[FULL]/
[PIP]
This sets the display method (full screen mode/windowed
mode) of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
337
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Operation]
[Fn Button Set]
[Setting in REC mode]
[Setting in PLAY mode]
Registers a function to the Fn button.
• For details, refer to page 293.
[ISO Displayed
Setting]
[Front Dial]
[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the setting screen for
ISO sensitivity.
Assigning [
] lets you change [ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting].
[Exposure Comp.
Disp. Setting]
[Cursor Buttons (Up/
Down)]
[
]/ [OFF]
This sets the operations of the
in the exposure
compensation screen.
Assigning [
] lets you set exposure bracketing.
[Front Dial]
[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]
This sets the operations of the dials in the exposure
compensation screen.
Assigning [
] lets you adjust flash output.
[Q.MENU]
[PRESET]/[CUSTOM]
Customizes the Quick menu.
• For details, refer to page 299.
338
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Operation]
[Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
[ ]/[ ]
Sets the operations to be assigned to the dials in [
]
mode.
[
]: Assigns the aperture value to the front dial,
and the shutter speed to the control dial.
[
]: Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and
the aperture value to the control dial.
[Rotation (F/SS)]
[ ]/[ ]
Changes the rotational directions of the dials for aperture
value and shutter speed adjustment.
[Exposure Comp.]
[
]/[ ]/ [OFF]
Assigns exposure compensation to
or .
(Except in [
] mode)
[Dial Operation
Switch Setup]
[
]
[
]
In the Fn button [Dial Operation Switch], this sets the
functions to be registered temporarily to
or . (297)
339
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Operation]
[Operation Lock
Setting]
[Cursor]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Touch Screen]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Dial]
[ON]/[OFF]
You can set an object for which operation is disabled when
[Operation Lock] is assigned to the function button using
[Fn Button Set] (293) in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
[Cursor]: Cursor buttons and
[Touch Screen]: Touch screen
[Dial]:
, and
[Focus Ring Lock]
[ON]/
[OFF]
(When an interchangeable lens with a focus ring is
attached)
This disables the focus ring operation during MF to lock the
focus.
• [MFL] is displayed on the recording screen while the
focus ring is locked.
[Video Rec. Button]
[ON]/[OFF]
Enabling/disabling the video rec. button.
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Touch Tab]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Touch AF]
[AF]/[AF+AE]
[Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]/
[OFFSET1] to [OFFSET7]/[OFF]
Enables touch operation on the monitor display.
[Touch Screen]: All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]: Operations of tabs, such as [
] on the right
side of the screen.
[Touch AF]: Operation to optimize the focus ([AF]) for a
touched subject. Alternatively, operation to optimize both the
focus and brightness ([AF+AE]). (142)
[Touch Pad AF]: Touch pad operation during viewfinder
display. (144)
340
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Auto Review]
[Duration Time
(photo)]
[HOLD]/[5SEC] to [1SEC] ( [2SEC])/
[OFF]
[Duration Time (4K
PHOTO)]
[HOLD]/[OFF]
[Duration Time (Post
Focus)]
[HOLD]/[OFF]
[Playback Operation
Priority]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This displays an image immediately after it is recorded.
[Duration Time (photo)]: Sets the Auto Review when
taking pictures.
[Duration Time (4K PHOTO)]: Sets the Auto Review when
recording 4K photos.
[Duration Time (Post Focus)]: Sets the Auto Review when
recording with Post-Focus.
[Playback Operation Priority]: When this is set to [ON],
you can toggle the playback screen during Auto Review, or
delete pictures.
• If you set [Duration Time (photo)] to [HOLD], the image
recorded stays displayed until the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
[Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
[Monochrome Live
View]
[ON]/
[OFF]
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
This is convenient for focusing with MF.
• The image outputted via HDMI will not be displayed in
black and white.
341
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Constant Preview]
[ON]/
[OFF]
[SET] [Preview While MF Assist]
You can always confirm the effects of aperture and shutter
speed on the recording screen when in [
] mode.
Preview also operates in the MF Assist screen when
[Preview While MF Assist] is set to [ON].
• This function does not work when using the flash.
[Live View Boost]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/
[OFF]
[SET] [P/A/S/M]/
[M]
Displays the screen brighter to make it easier to check
subjects and compositions even in low-light environment.
[MODE1]: Setting for low brightness, with priority given to
a soft display.
[MODE2]: Setting for high brightness, with priority given to
image visibility.
• You can change the recording mode in which [Live View
Boost] works by using [SET].
• This mode does not affect recorded images.
• Noise may be more noticeable in the screen than in the
recorded image.
• This function does not work in the following cases:
– When adjusting the exposure (when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, for example)
– When recording a video or 4K photo
– When using [Filter Settings]
– When using [Constant Preview]
342
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Peaking]
[ON]/[OFF]
[SET] [Detect Level]
[Display Color]
During MF operation, in-focus portions (portions on the
screen with clear outlines) are highlighted with color.
• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions
to be highlighted are reduced, allowing you to achieve a
more precise focus.
• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the
[Display Color] setting as follows.
[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]
[Display Color]
(Light blue) (Blue)
(Yellow) (Orange)
(Yellow
Green)
(Green)
(Pink) (Red)
(White) (Gray)
• Each time [
] in [ ] is touched, the setting is
switched in order of [
] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) →
[
] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) → [OFF].
• When [Rough Monochrome] of [
] mode is being used,
[Peaking] is not available.
• When [Live View Boost] is being used, [Peaking] is not
available.
343
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Histogram]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This displays the histogram.
Turning this [ON] displays the histogram transition screen.
Press
to set the position.
• You can also move the position by dragging the
histogram on the recording screen.
• A histogram is a graph that displays
brightness along the horizontal axis,
and the number of pixels at each
brightness level on the vertical axis.
By looking at the distribution of the
graph, you can determine the current
exposure.
Dark
Bright
• When the recorded image and the histogram do not
match each other under the following conditions, the
histogram is displayed in orange:
– During exposure compensation
– When the flash fires
– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as in
low light situations.
• The histogram is an approximation in the recording
mode.
[Guide Line]
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/ [OFF]
Sets the grid line pattern to be displayed on the recording
screen.
When using [
], you can press to set the
position.
• When using [
], you can also drag [ ] on the grid
lines on the recording screen to move the position.
344
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Frame Marker]
[ON]/
[OFF]
[SET] [Frame Aspect]
[Frame Color]
[Frame Mask]
A frame with the set aspect ratio is displayed on the
recording screen.
• For details, refer to page 268.
[Center Marker]
[ON]/
[OFF]
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
[Highlight]
[ON]/
[OFF]
Overexposed areas appear blinking
in black and white during Auto Review
or playback.
• The display without the highlights is added to the display
shown when [DISP.] is pressed in the playback screen.
Use this to delete the highlight display. (60)
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1]/[ZEBRA2]/
[OFF]
[SET] [Zebra 1]
[Zebra 2]
Parts that are brighter than the benchmark value are
displayed with stripes.
• For details, refer to page 267.
345
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Expo.Meter]
[ON]/
[OFF]
This displays the exposure meter.
8.04.0 5.6 11
15 30 60 125 250
• Set to [ON] to display the exposure meter when
performing Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting
shutter speed.
• If no operations are performed for a certain period of
time, the exposure meter disappears.
[MF Guide]
[ON]/[OFF]
During MF, MF Guide, which acts as a guide to recording
distance, is displayed on the screen.
[LVF/Monitor Disp.
Set]
[LVF Disp. Set]
[
]/ [ ]
[Monitor Disp. Set]
[
]/ [ ]
You can switch the viewfinder/monitor display method.
[
]: Display the icons outside of the live
view area.
60
p
[ ]: Display the icons within the live
view area.
60
p
[Monitor Info. Disp.]
[ON]/[OFF]
Displays the monitor recording information screen.
346
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Monitor / Display]
[Rec Area]
[ ]/[ ]
Switching the angle of view setting used for recording still
pictures and video.
[
]: Indicated as the angle of view when recording still
pictures.
[
]: Indicated as the angle of view when recording video.
• The recording area indicated is an approximation.
• [Rec Area] is fixed to [
] when recording 4K photos or
recording in [Post Focus].
[Remaining Disp.]
[ ] (Remaining Shots)/[ ] (Remaining Time)
Switching the display between the number of recordable
pictures that you can take and the available recording time.
[Red REC Frame
Indicator]
[ON]/[OFF]
A red frame is displayed on the recording screen that
indicates that video is being recorded.
[Menu Guide]
[ON]/[OFF]
You can display the selection screen when the mode dial is
switched to [
]/[ ].
347
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]
[Lens Position
Resume]
[ON]/
[OFF]
The camera saves the focus position when you turn it off.
When an interchangeable lens that is compatible with power
zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.
[Power Zoom Lens]
[Disp Focal Length]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Step Zoom] [ON]/
[OFF]
[Zoom Speed]
[Photo] [H]/
[M]/[L]
[Video] [H]/
[M]/[L]
[Zoom Ring]
[ON]/[OFF]
Sets the screen display and operation when using an
interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom. (156)
[Lens Fn Button
Setting]
[Focus Stop]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[Stabilizer]/[Focus
Area Set]/[AF Mode/MF]/[Preview]/[Focus Ring Lock]/[Off]/
[Restore to Default]
Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an
interchangeable lens.
• You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus
selector switch of a compatible interchangeable lens to
[Fn] and then pressing the focus button of the lens.
• When [Focus Stop] is used, the focus is locked while the
focus button is pressed and held.
348
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]
[Aperture Ring
Increment]
[SMOOTH]/
[1/3EV]
[SMOOTH]: You can finely adjust the aperture value.
[1/3EV]: You can adjust the aperture value in increments
of 1/3 EV.
You can change the aperture adjustment increment by
operating the aperture ring.
• This setting is available when an interchangeable
lens that supports a click-less aperture ring (optional:
H-X1025) is attached (as of June 2020).
• When taking pictures, this setting will take effect if the
aperture ring is set to a position other than [A].
• If the position of the aperture ring is set to [A], the
aperture value set by the camera will take effect and can
be adjusted like with [1/3EV].
• During video recording, fine adjustments can be made
like with [SMOOTH].
• When [SMOOTH] is set, fractions of aperture values are
not displayed on the screen.
[Self Timer Auto
Off]
[ON]/[OFF]
The self-timer is canceled if the unit is turned off.
[Self Shot]
[ON]/[OFF]
If you set [Self Shot] to [OFF], the mode will not switch to
Self Shot Mode (83) even if you rotate the monitor.
[AF After
Countdown]
[ON]/[OFF]
The camera focuses automatically after the self-shot
countdown ends.
349
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]
[Face Recog.]
[ON]/
[OFF]/[MEMORY]
The Face Recognition function recognizes a face similar
to a registered face and automatically adjusts focus and
exposure for the face with higher priority.
Registering face pictures
Up to 6 people’s face pictures can be registered along with
such information as name and birthdate.
1
Use to select [MEMORY] and press .
2
Use to select [New] and press .
3
Align the face with the guide and record.
• Faces of subjects other than people (e.g. pets)
cannot be registered.
• When
is pressed or [ ] is touched, an
explanation is displayed.
4
Use to select the item for editing and press .
[Name]: Set the name.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer
to “Entering Characters” (370)
[Age]: Set the birthdate.
[Add Images]: Up to 3 face pictures of the person can
be registered.
Use to select [Add] and press
.
• When a registered face picture
is selected with cursor button,
a screen to confirm deletion is
displayed. Select [Yes] to delete
the face picture.
Record the picture. (step 3)
350
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]
[Face Recog.]
(Continued)
Editing or deleting information about registered
persons
1
Use to select [MEMORY] and press .
2
Use to select the picture of the person to be
edited or deleted and press
.
3
Use to select the item and press .
[Info Edit]: Edit name or other registered information.
(Step
4 of “Registering face pictures”)
[Priority]: Set priority order for focus and exposure.
Use to select the registration
order and press
.
[Delete]: Delete information and face pictures of
registered persons.
• In some cases, the camera cannot recognize or
incorrectly recognizes even registered people depending
on their expression or the environment.
• [Face Recog.] functions only when AF mode is set to
[
].
• Only the first picture of the burst recording will contain
Face Recognition information.
• The name of the person recognized in the first picture is
displayed in the case of group pictures.
• When the following functions are being used, [Face
Recog.] is not available:
– [Slimming Mode] (Self Shot Mode)
– [Slimming Mode] in [Clear Portrait] ([
] mode)
– [Miniature Effect] ([
] mode)
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [Time Lapse Shot]
– [Multi Exp.]
351
13. Menu Guide
[Custom] menu [Lens / Others]
[Profile Setup]
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/ [OFF] / [SET]
The name and age of the baby/pet are recorded to the
image.
Setting the name and age in months/years
1
Use to select [SET] and press .
2
Use to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and press
.
3
Use to select [Age] or [Name] and press .
4
Use to select [SET] and press .
Enter the [Age].
Enter the [Name].
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to
“Entering Characters” (370)
Canceling the display of the name and age in months/
years
Set [Profile Setup] to [OFF].
• [Name] and [Age] print settings can be made on your
computer using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software, which
you download from a website. Text may also be stamped
onto the still picture using the camera’s [Text Stamp].
• When the following functions are being used, [Profile
Setup] is not available:
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
• You cannot record the name or age in months/years in
the following cases:
– During video recording
– Still pictures that are taken while recording video
352
13. Menu Guide
[Setup] Menu
: Default settings
[Online Manual]
[URL display]/[QR Code display]
Displays the URL or QR code in order to download the
“Owner’s Manual” (PDF format).
[Cust.Set Mem.]
[C1]/[C2]/[C3]
You can register the currently set information of the camera.
• For details, refer to page 303.
[Clock Set]
Sets the date and time.
• For details, refer to page 45.
[World Time]
[
] [Destination]
[ ] [Home]
Sets the times for the region where you live and your travel
destination.
• You can set [Destination] after setting [Home].
1
Use to select [Destination] or [Home] and press
.
2
Use to select area and press .
When [Home] has been selected.
Current time
Time difference
from GMT
(Greenwich Mean
Time)
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press . (The
time will move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press
again.
• When you come back from your travel destination, select
[Home] in step
1 and press .
353
13. Menu Guide
[Travel Date]
[Travel Setup] [SET]/
[OFF]
[Location] [SET]/
[OFF]
[Travel Setup]: If you set your travel schedule and record
pictures, the day of your trip on which the picture was taken
will be recorded.
[Location]: Once the [Travel Setup] is set, you can set the
location.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering
Characters”. (370)
• To print [Location] or the number of days that have
passed, either use [Text Stamp] (365) or print using the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software.
• The travel date is calculated from the set departure date
and the date set in the camera’s clock. When destination
is set in [World Time], days elapsed are calculated based
on local destination time.
• When [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], the number of days
elapsed is not recorded. It is not displayed even if [Travel
Setup] is set to [SET] after recording.
• When the current date passes the return date, [Travel
Setup] is automatically canceled.
• [Location] cannot be recorded while recording video,
recording 4K photos, or recording in [Post Focus].
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function] (371)
[Wi-Fi Setup] (427)
354
13. Menu Guide
[Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth] (375)
[Send Image (Smartphone)] (407)
[Remote Wakeup] (396)
[Returning from Sleep Mode] (390)
[Auto Transfer] (393)
[Location Logging] (395)
[Auto Clock Set] (397)
[Wi-Fi network settings]
[Wi-Fi network settings]: Registers the Wi-Fi access point.
Wireless access points used to connect the camera to Wi-Fi
networks will be registered automatically.
[Wireless
Connection Lamp]
[ON]/[OFF]
The lamp lights while the wireless function is operating.
[Beep]
[Beep Volume]
[
] (High)/ [ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)
[Shutter Vol.]
[
] (High)/ [ ] (Low)/[ ] (Off)
[Shutter Tone]
[ ] (Pattern 1)/[ ] (Pattern 2)/
[
] (Pattern 3)
Sets the beep sounds and electronic shutter sounds.
• When [Silent Mode] is being used, [Beep Volume] and
[Shutter Vol.] are fixed to Off.
355
13. Menu Guide
[Economy]
[Sleep Mode] [10MIN.]/
[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1 MIN.]/
[OFF]
[Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)]
[ON]/[OFF]
[Auto LVF/Monitor
Off]
[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1 MIN.]/[OFF]
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
[Time]
[Display]
This is a function to automatically turn the camera to sleep
(power save) status or turn off the viewfinder/monitor if no
operation is performed for a set time.
• For details, refer to page 37.
[Monitor Display
Speed]
[ECO 30fps]/
[60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the monitor.
[ECO 30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer
operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• When the following functions are being used, [Monitor
Display Speed] is not available:
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– HDMI output
[LVF Display Speed]
[ECO 30fps]/
[60fps]
Sets the display speed for live view on the viewfinder.
[ECO 30fps]: Reduces the power consumption for a longer
operating time.
[60fps]: Enables smooth display of movements.
• When the following functions are being used, [LVF
Display Speed] is not available:
– [
] mode, [ ] mode
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– HDMI output
356
13. Menu Guide
[Monitor Display]/
[Viewfinder]
[Brightness]/[Contrast]/[Saturation]/[Red Tint]/[Blue Tint]
This adjusts the brightness, coloring, and red or blue tints of
the monitor/viewfinder.
1
Press to select the setting item, and press
to adjust.
2
Press to confirm the setting.
• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and
the viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.
[Monitor
Luminance]/
[LVF Luminance]
[AUTO]/[-3] to [+3]
Adjusts monitor/viewfinder luminance.
[AUTO]: The brightness is adjusted automatically
depending on how bright it is around the camera.
• Adjusts the monitor luminance when displaying the
monitor, and the viewfinder luminance when displaying
the viewfinder.
• When either [AUTO] is set, or the adjusted value is set to
positive side, the usage period will shorten.
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity]
[HIGH]/[LOW]
This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor Switch]
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic
viewfinder/monitor switching)/
[LVF] (viewfinder)/[MON] (monitor)
This will set the method for switching between the
viewfinder and monitor.
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor
Switch] setting will also switch.
357
13. Menu Guide
[USB Mode]
[ ] [Select on connection]/[ ] [PC(Storage)]/
[
] [PictBridge(PTP)]
This sets the communication method to be used when the
USB connection cable is connected.
[
] [Select on connection]: Select this setting to
select the USB communication system when connecting to
another device.
[
] [PC(Storage)]: Select this setting to export images to
a connected PC.
[
] [PictBridge(PTP)]: Select this setting when
connecting to a printer that supports PictBridge.
[TV Connection]
[HDMI Mode (Play)]
[AUTO]/[4K/30p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/
[720p]/[480p]
Sets the HDMI output resolution for playback.
[AUTO]: Outputs with a resolution suited to the connected
TV.
• If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch to
a constant setting other than [AUTO] to set a format
supported by your TV.
(Refer to the operating instructions for the TV.)
358
13. Menu Guide
[TV Connection]
(Continued)
[HDMI Info Display
(Rec)]
[MODE1]/[MODE2]/[OFF]
Sets the camera’s information display that will be outputted
to the external device connected via HDMI.
[MODE1]: This constantly outputs the information display.
[MODE2]: This outputs the information display for
5 seconds when the camera is operated.
[OFF]: This does not output the information display.
• When set to [OFF], only the following switches/buttons
are enabled.
– Camera on/off switch
– Shutter button
– Video rec. button
– [
] button
[VIERA Link] [ON]/
[OFF]
You can use the device remote control to operate the
camera when it is connected to a VIERA Link compatible
device using an HDMI micro cable.
• For details, refer to page 435.
[Language]
This set the language displayed on the screen.
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [
]
from the menu icons to set the desired language.
[Version Disp.]
You can check the firmware versions of the camera and
lens.
Press
to display information about the camera software.
359
13. Menu Guide
[Folder / File
Settings]
[Select Folder]/[Create a New Folder]/[File Name Setting]
Set the folder and file name where to save the images.
• For details, refer to page 121.
[No.Reset]
Resets the file number of the next recording to 0001.
• For details, refer to page 123.
[Reset]
Returns the camera to its default settings.
• For details, refer to page 67.
[Reset Network
Settings]
Network settings are reset to the default, such as equipment
information you have registered using [Wi-Fi Setup] or
[Bluetooth].
(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
[Pixel Refresh]
This optimizes the image sensor and image processing.
• The image sensor and image processing are optimized
when the camera is purchased. Use this function when
bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[Level Gauge
Adjust.]
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press
. The
level gauge will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
[Demo Mode]
You can try focusing, peaking, etc. in [Post Focus], with the
image picture.
[Approved
Regulations]
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
[Format]
Formats the card (initialization).
• For details, refer to page 40.
360
13. Menu Guide
[Playback] Menu
How to Select an Image(s) in the [Playback] menu
Follow the steps below when the image selection screen is displayed.
When [Single] has been selected
Press to select the image.
SetSet
Press .
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right
bottom of the screen, the setting is
canceled when
is pressed again.
When [Multi] has been selected
Press to select the image and
then press
(repeat).
• The setting is canceled when is
pressed again.
2 3
4 5 6
1
OKOK
Press [DISP.] to execute.
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
Press to select the image, and
then press
to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when is pressed
again.
Set/Cancel
2 3
4 5 6
1
361
13. Menu Guide
: Default settings
[Slide Show]
[ALL]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]
Selects image types and plays them back at regular
intervals in order.
[Start]: Starts slide show playback.
[Effect]: Allows you to select the screen effects when
switching from one picture to the next.
[Setup]: [Duration]/[Repeat]/[Sound]
[Duration]: Sets the duration to play an image.
[Duration] can be set only when [Effect] is set to
[OFF].
[Repeat]: Sets repeat playback.
[Sound]: If you select [AUTO], music will be
played for still pictures, and audio will be played
for videos. You can also select a setting to play
just one of the two or neither.
Operations during slide show
: Plays/pauses.
You can also perform the same operation by touching
[
].
: Move to the previous image
: Move to the next image
: Ends the slide show
: Adjusts the volume
You can also perform the same operation by touching
[
] or [ ].
• When [Video Only] is set, [Duration] is not available.
[Playback Mode]
[Normal Play]/[Picture Only]/[Video Only]
Filters the type of images to play back.
362
13. Menu Guide
[Protect]
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
You can set protection for images so that they will not be
deleted by mistake.
However, if you format the card, the protected images will
also be deleted.
• For information about how to select images, refer to page
360.
• Be careful because the [Protect] setting may be disabled
on a device other than this camera.
[Rating]
[Single]/[Multi]/[Cancel]
If you set any of the five different rating levels for images,
you can do the following:
• Deleting all images except for those with ratings.
• Check the rating level in the file details display in
operating systems such as Windows 10, Windows 8.1,
and Windows 8. (JPEG images only)
1
Select an image. (360)
2
Press to select a rating level (1 to 5) and then
press
.
• When [Multi] is selected, repeat Steps
1 and 2.
• To cancel the setting, set the rating level to [OFF].
363
13. Menu Guide
[Title Edit]
You can enter characters (titles etc.) on a recorded picture.
After text has been registered, it can be stamped in prints
using [Text Stamp] (365).
1
Select a still picture (360).
• [
] is displayed for pictures with texts already
stamped.
2
Enter characters.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to
“Entering Characters” (370).
• To delete texts, delete all the characters in the
character input screen.
• You can print out texts using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
software.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
• [Title Edit] is not available for images recorded using the
following functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
], [ ], [ ] ([Quality])
364
13. Menu Guide
[Face Rec Edit]
[REPLACE]/[DELETE]
Edit or delete the recognition information for pictures with
incorrect information.
1
Use to select picture and press .
2
Use to select a person and press .
• If [DELETE], go to step
4.
3
Use to select the person to replace for
another and press
.
4
Use to select [Yes] and press .
• When Face Recognition information is deleted, it cannot
be restored.
[RAW Processing]
Processes pictures taken in RAW format on the camera and
saves them in JPEG format.
• For details, refer to page 286.
[4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving]
You can save any 5 second period of pictures from a 4K
burst file all at once.
• For details, refer to page 175.
[Light Composition]
Select multiple frames from 4K burst files that you wish
to combine. Parts of the image that are brighter than the
preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding
frame to combine the frames into one picture.
• For details, refer to page 280.
[Sequence
Composition]
Selects multiple frames from a 4K burst file to create a
sequence composition of a moving subject into one picture.
• For details, refer to page 282.
[Clear Retouch]
Erases unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures taken.
• For details, refer to page 284.
365
13. Menu Guide
[Text Stamp]
You can stamp the recording date and time, names, travel
destination, travel dates, etc. on the recorded still pictures.
1
Select a still picture (360).
• [
] is displayed on the screen if the picture is
already stamped with [Text Stamp].
2
Select the content to stamp.
• Use
to select [Set] and press .
[Shooting Date]: [W/O TIME] (recording date)/
[WITH TIME] (recording date and time)
[Name]: [
] (Name registered in Face
Recognition)/[
] (Name registered in [Profile
Setup])
[Location]: Location registered in [Setup] menu’s
[Travel Date]
[Travel Date]: Number of days that have elapsed
since the travel date set in [Setup] menu’s [Travel
Date]
[Title]: Text registered in [Title Edit]
3
Press [ ].
4
Use to select [OK] and press .
• Do not request date printing in store or make date
printing on printer for still pictures with date stamps.
(Date printing may be overlapped.)
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
• The picture quality may be coarser.
• [Text Stamp] is not available for images recorded using
the following functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
] ([Quality])
– [Text Stamp]
• Date information cannot be stamped on images recorded
without setting the clock.
366
13. Menu Guide
[Resize]
[Single]/[Multi]
Reduce the picture size of JPEG images and save them as
different images to enable them to be easily used for web
pages or sent as email attachments.
• For information about how to select images, refer to page
360.
– When [Single] is selected, after choosing the image,
press
to select the size, then press .
– When [Multi] is selected, before choosing the images,
press
to select the size, then press .
• You can set up to 100 images at once with [Multi].
• The image quality of the resized image becomes lower.
• [Resize] is not available for images recorded using the
following functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– Group images
– [
] ([Quality])
– [Text Stamp]
367
13. Menu Guide
[Cropping]
Enlarge your still pictures and crop unwanted areas.
1
Use to select a still picture and press .
2
Select area to crop and press .
Operations during cropping
: Enlarges/reduces the screen.
You can also perform the same operation by
touching [
]/[ ].
: Moves the enlarged area.
You can perform the same operation by
dragging on the screen.
• Original Face Recognition information will not be copied
when still pictures are cropped.
• Picture quality is reduced after cropping.
• Edit group pictures one by one.
• [Cropping] is not available for images recorded using the
following functions:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
– [
] ([Quality])
– [Text Stamp]
[Rotate]
Rotate images manually in 90° steps.
[
]: Rotates 90° clockwise.
[
]: Rotates 90° counter-clockwise.
• For information about how to select images, refer to page
360.
[Video Divide]
Divide a recorded video or 4K burst file into two.
• For details, refer to page 290.
368
13. Menu Guide
[Time Lapse Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Time
Lapse Shot].
1
Press to select a group images recorded with
[Time Lapse Shot] and then press
.
2
Select the options for creating a video to combine the
pictures into a video.
• For details, refer to page 193.
[Stop Motion Video]
This creates videos from group images recorded with [Stop
Motion Animation].
1
Press to select a group images recorded with
[Stop Motion Animation] and then press
.
2
Select the options for creating a video to combine the
pictures into a video.
• For details, refer to page 193.
[Rotate Disp.]
[ON]/[OFF]
Automatically displays pictures vertically if they were
recorded when holding the camera vertically.
[Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME]/
[DATE/TIME]
This sets the order in which the camera displays images
during playback.
[FILE NAME]: Displays images by folder name/file name.
[DATE/TIME]: Displays images by recording date.
• If you insert another card, it may take some time to read
all data, therefore pictures may not be displayed in the
set order.
369
13. Menu Guide
[Delete
Confirmation]
["Yes" first]/
["No" first]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted
first when the confirmation screen for deleting an image is
displayed.
["Yes" first]: [Yes] is highlighted first.
["No" first]: [No] is highlighted first.
[Delete All Images]
[Delete All]/[Delete All Non-rating]
Deletes all images in a card.
[Delete All]: Deletes all images in a card.
[Delete All Non-rating]: Deletes all images except those
with a rating set.
• [Delete All] can be used when [Playback Mode] is set to
[Normal Play].
• Images cannot be restored once they have been deleted.
Carefully confirm the images before deletion.
• Depending on the number of images to be deleted, it may
take some time to delete them.
370
13. Menu Guide
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below when the character entry screen is displayed.
1
Enter characters.
● Press to select characters
and then press
until the
character to enter is displayed.
(Repeat this)
• To repeatedly enter the same character,
rotate
or to the right to move the
entry position cursor.
• If you select an item and press , you can perform the following operations:
– [
]: Change the character type to [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower
case characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
– [
]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [
]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [
]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
2
Complete entering.
● Select [Set] and then press .
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered (maximum of 9 characters
when setting names in [Face Recog.]).
• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [
], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ]
(maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.]).
371
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
This chapter explains the Wi-Fi
®
and Bluetooth
®
functions of the camera.
Remote Operations from a Smartphone
You can use the “LUMIX
Sync” for remote recording
and image transfers.
373
Transferring Images from This Camera
Send recorded images to a
device connected via Wi-Fi by
operating the camera.
400
This document refers to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones.
Checking operation of the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions
The Bluetooth function is set to on, or there is a connection
(The Wi-Fi icon will be displayed when a function connecting to Wi-Fi is used after
Bluetooth connection, such as [Auto Transfer].)
The Wi-Fi function is set to on, or there is a connection
When image data is sent using a camera operation, [
] is displayed on the monitor.
WIRELESS connection lamp (Blue)
Lit: When the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function is ON or
connected.
Blinking: When sending picture data.
372
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• Do not remove the card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information
security.
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery when sending
images.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to
or maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• Images may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If
the connection is terminated while sending images, images with parts that
cannot be displayed may be sent.
373
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connecting to a Smartphone
You can perform remote recording and transfer images using the
smartphone app “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” (hereinafter referred to as
“LUMIX Sync”).
Flow of connecting a smartphone
1
Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (374)
2
Connect to a smartphone.
Using a smartphone that supports
Bluetooth Low Energy
• Bluetooth connection (375)
Using a smartphone that does not
support Bluetooth Low Energy
• Wi-Fi connection (380)
3
Operate the camera using the smartphone. (386)
• [Remote shooting] (387)
• [Shutter Remote Control] (389)
• [Import images] (391)
• [Auto Transfer] (393)
• [Location Logging] (395)
• [Remote Wakeup] (396)
• [Auto Clock Set] (397)
• You can also use the camera to transfer images to a smartphone.
(400)
374
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Installing “LUMIX Sync”
“LUMIX Sync” is an application for smartphones provided by Panasonic.
Supported OS
Android™: Android 5 or higher
iOS: iOS 11 or higher
1
Connect the smartphone to a network.
2
(Android) Select “Google Play™ Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3
Enter “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” or “LUMIX” into the
search box.
4
Select and install the “Panasonic LUMIX Sync” .
• Use the latest version.
• Supported OSs are current as of June 2020 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “LUMIX Sync” menu for further details on how to
operate.
• The app may not operate correctly depending on your smartphone.
For information on the “LUMIX Sync”, refer to the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
375
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connecting to a Smartphone (Bluetooth Connection)
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a
smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically connects to the
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• For the first-time connection, pairing settings are required.
For information about connecting for the second and subsequent times, refer to
page 378.
• Supported smartphones
Android™: Android 5 or higher with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher
(excluding those that do not support Bluetooth Low Energy)
iOS: iOS 11 or higher
• Turn on the smartphone’s Bluetooth function in advance.
1
On the smartphone, start up
“LUMIX Sync”.
● A message regarding device
(camera) registration is displayed.
Select [Next].
• If you have closed the message, select
[
], then register the camera using
[Camera registration (pairing)].
2
Check the content in the displayed guide and select
[Next] until the screen to register the camera is
displayed.
376
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Operating the camera in accordance with the smartphone guide.
3
Set the camera to Bluetooth
pairing standby state.
● [ ] [Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth]
[SET] [Pairing]
● The camera enters pairing standby
state and the device name
is
displayed.
4
On the smartphone, select the
camera’s device name.
• (iOS devices) When a message to
confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
5
When a message indicating
that device registration is
complete, select [OK].
● A Bluetooth connection between the
camera and the smartphone will be
made.
377
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• The paired smartphone is registered as a paired device.
• During Bluetooth connection, [
] is displayed in the recording screen.
When the Bluetooth function is enabled, but a connection is not established
with the smartphone, [
] appears translucent.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered.
If you try to register more than 16 smartphones, the registration information
will be deleted from the oldest first.
End Bluetooth Connection
To terminate the Bluetooth connection, turn off the Bluetooth function of
the camera.
[ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] Select [OFF]
• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not
be deleted.
378
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connecting to a Paired Smartphone
Connect paired smartphones using the following procedure.
Enable the Bluetooth function of the camera.
• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [ON]
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
Select [ ].
Select [Bluetooth Setup].
Turn Bluetooth ON.
From [Camera registered] items, select
the camera’s device name.
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only
connect to one smartphone at a time.
• When pairing takes some time, canceling the pairing settings on both the
smartphone and camera and re-establishing the connection may result in
the camera being detected correctly.
379
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Canceling Pairing
Cancel the pairing setting of the camera.
• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Bluetooth] [SET] [Delete]
Select the smartphone for which to cancel the pairing.
• Also cancel the pairing setting on the smartphone.
• When [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu is used to reset the
network settings, the information for registered devices is deleted.
380
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connecting to a Smartphone (Wi-Fi connection)
Use Wi-Fi to connect the camera and a smartphone.
With default settings, simple connection with smartphones is possible
without entering a password.
You can also use password authentication for enhanced connection
security.
1
Set the camera to Wi-Fi
connection standby status.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi
Function]
[New Connection]
[Remote Shooting & View]
● The SSID of the camera is
displayed on the screen.
• You can also perform the same operation
by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer
to page 292.
2
In the setting menu of the
smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi
function ON.
3
Select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
381
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
4
On the smartphone, start up
“LUMIX Sync”.
5
(At the first connection)
Confirm the device name
displayed on the camera and
then select [Yes].
• When a device different than the one you want to connect to is displayed,
the camera will automatically connect to that device if you select [Yes].
If there are other Wi-Fi connection devices nearby, we recommend using
either QR code or manual password input to connect with password
authentication. (382)
382
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Using Password Authentication to Connect
You can enhance Wi-Fi connection security by using password
authentication through either QR code or manual input.
Scanning QR code to connect
Set [Wi-Fi Password] on the camera to [ON].
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [Wi-Fi Password] [ON]
Display the QR code .
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function]
[New Connection] [Remote Shooting
& View]
• You can also perform the same operation
by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer
to page 292.
• Press
to enlarge the QR code.
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for
cameras, close the message.
Select [ ].
Select [Wi-Fi connection].
Select [QR code].
Scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the camera using “LUMIX
Sync”.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
383
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Manually entering a password to connect
Display the screen in Step on page 382.
In the setting menu of the smartphone,
turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
On the Wi-Fi setup screen, select the
SSID
displayed on the camera.
(At the first connection)
Enter the password
displayed on the
camera.
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX
Sync”.
384
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connection Methods Other Than the Default Settings
When connecting with [Via Network], or [WPS Connection] in [Direct],
follow the steps below:
Display the connection method setting screen for the camera.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [New Connection] [Remote
Shooting & View]
Press [DISP.].
Connecting via network
1
Select [Via Network] and then press .
• Follow the connection method on page 418 to connect the camera to a wireless
access point.
2
In the setting menu of the smartphone, turn the Wi-Fi function ON.
3
Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point that the camera is
connected to.
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Connecting directly
1
Select [Direct] and then press .
• Select [WPS Connection], and follow the connection method on page 421 to
connect the camera to a smartphone.
2
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
385
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection
To end the Wi-Fi connection between the camera and smartphone, follow
the steps below.
1
Set the camera to recording
mode.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
2
Terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[Yes]
• You can also perform the same operation
by pressing the Fn button assigned with
[Wi-Fi].
For information about the Fn button, refer
to page 292.
3
On the smartphone, close the “LUMIX Sync”.
386
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Operating the Camera with a
Smartphone
This explains the functions for operating the camera from a smartphone.
Functions described in this document with the (
) symbol require
a smartphone that supports Bluetooth Low Energy.
Getting started:
• Connect the camera to a smartphone. (375, 380)
• On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Home Screen
When you start up “LUMIX Sync”, the home screen is displayed.
App settings
(378, 382, 396)
This allows connection
settings, camera power
operations, and displays
Help.
[Import images] (391)
[Remote shooting]
(387)
[Shutter Remote Control]
(389)
387
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Remote shooting]
You can use the smartphone to record from a remote location while
viewing the live view images from the camera.
1
Select [ ] ([Remote shooting]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Start recording.
Takes a picture
Starts/ends the video recording
• The recorded image is saved on the
camera.
• Certain features, including some settings, may not be available.
388
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Operation Method During Remote Recording
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to
be used during remote recording.
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] Select [Priority of Remote Device]
[Camera]
Operation is possible on both the camera and the
smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with
the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Operation is possible only on the smartphone.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the
smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the
camera to turn on the screen, and select [End].
• The default setting is [Camera].
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is
active.
389
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Shutter Remote Control]
You can use the smartphone as a remote control for the shutter.
1
Select [ ] ([Shutter Remote Control]) in the home
screen.
2
Start recording.
Starts/ends the video recording
Takes a picture
• Bulb recording (389)
Bulb Recording
The shutter can be kept open from the start to end of recording, which is
useful for recording of starry skies or night scenery.
Getting started:
• Set the camera to [
] mode. (98)
• Set the camera shutter speed to [T] (Time). (100)
Touch [ ] to start recording (keep touching, without removing your
finger).
Remove your finger from [ ] to end recording.
• Slide [ ] in the direction of [LOCK] to record with the shutter button locked in
a fully-pressed state.
(Slide [
] back to its original position or press the camera shutter button to
end recording)
• During [B] (Bulb) recording, if the Bluetooth connection is broken, then carry out
Bluetooth connection again, then end recording from the smartphone.
390
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Shortening the Return Time from [Sleep Mode]
You can shorten the time it takes for the camera to return from [Sleep
Mode] when the [Shutter Remote Control] is used.
Getting started:
• Set [Remote Wakeup] in [Bluetooth] to [ON]. (396)
[ ] [Bluetooth] Select [Returning from Sleep Mode]
[Import / Remote
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Import
images] or [Remote shooting].
[Shutter Remote
Priority]
Shortens the time to return when using [Shutter
Remote Control].
• To use the [Shutter Remote Control] to cancel [Sleep Mode] on the camera,
set [Bluetooth] in the [Setup] menu as follows, then connect via Bluetooth:
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON] (396)
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF] (393)
• The camera cannot be turned on by using [Shutter Remote Control].
391
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Import images]
Transfer an image stored on the card to the smartphone connected via
Wi-Fi.
1
Select [ ] ([Import images]) in the home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is
displayed, select [Join].
2
Select the image to transfer.
3
Transfer the image.
● Select [ ].
• If the image is a video, you can play it
back by touching [
] at the center of
the screen.
392
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• When a video is played back, this has a small data size and is transmitted
using “LUMIX Sync”, therefore its image quality will differ from that of the
actual video recording.
Depending on the smartphone and on the usage conditions, the image
quality may deteriorate or the sound may skip during video or picture
playback.
• Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.
• Images recorded using the following functions cannot be transferred:
– [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
393
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Auto Transfer]
You can automatically transfer recorded pictures to a smartphone as they
are taken.
1
Enable [Auto Transfer] on the
camera.
● [ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto
Transfer]
[ON]
• If a confirmation screen is displayed
on the camera asking you to terminate
the Wi-Fi connection, select [Yes] to
terminate it.
2
On the smartphone, select [Yes] (for Android devices) or
[Join] (for iOS devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
3
Check the send settings on the
camera and then press
.
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.].
(424)
• The camera will enter a mode where it
can automatically transfer images and
[
] will be displayed on the recording
screen.
4
Record with the camera.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
394
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
To Stop the Automatic Transfer of Images
[ ] [Bluetooth] [Auto Transfer] Select [OFF]
● A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection.
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the
camera automatically connects to the smartphone via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
when you turn on the camera.
Start up the “LUMIX Sync” on the smartphone to connect to the camera.
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] cannot be used.
• If the camera is turned off during image transfer, and the file sending is
interrupted, then turn on the camera to restart the sending.
– If the storage status of unsent files changes, then sending of files may no
longer be possible.
– If there are many unsent files, then sending of all files may not be
possible.
• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be transferred
automatically:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
395
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Location Logging]
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via
Bluetooth, and the camera performs recording while writing the acquired
location information.
Getting started:
• Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
1
Enable [Location Logging] on
the camera.
● [ ] [Bluetooth] [Location
Logging]
[ON]
• The camera will enter a mode where
location information can be recorded
and [
] is displayed in the recording
screen of the camera.
2
Record images with the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded images.
• When [ ] on the recording screen appears translucent, location
information cannot be acquired, therefore data cannot be written.
Smartphone GPS positioning may not be possible if the smartphone is
within a building, a bag, or similar. Move the smartphone to a position
affording a wide view of the sky to improve positioning performance.
In addition, refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [
].
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the
subject when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
396
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Remote Wakeup]
Even when the camera is turned off, the smartphone can be used to start
the camera and record images, or check the recorded images.
Getting started:
Enable [Remote Wakeup] on the camera.
• [ ] [Bluetooth] [Remote Wakeup] [ON]
Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
Turning On the Camera
Select [Remote shooting] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
• (iOS devices) When a message to confirm the change of destination is displayed,
select [Join].
• The camera turns on, and automatically connects using Wi-Fi.
Turning Off the Camera
Select [ ] in the “LUMIX Sync” home screen.
Select [Turn off the camera].
Select [Power OFF].
• When [Remote Wakeup] has been set, the Bluetooth function continues
to work even if the camera on/off switch is set to [OFF], so the battery will
drain.
397
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Auto Clock Set]
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those
of a smartphone.
Enable [Auto Clock Set] on the
camera.
● [ ] [Bluetooth]
[Auto Clock Set]
[ON]
398
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Displaying still pictures on a TV
You can display still pictures on a TV that is compatible with a DLNA
(DMR) function.
1
Select [Playback on TV].
● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi
Function]
[New Connection]
[Playback on TV]
2
Connect the camera to the TV
via Wi-Fi.
● Select [Via Network] (418) or
[Direct] (421) to connect.
3
Select the device you wish to connect to.
4
Take or play back still pictures on this unit.
● To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
399
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
• When you display the pictures on a TV using the Wi-Fi function, they are not
output using 4K resolution. To output pictures using 4K resolution, connect
this unit to the TV using an HDMI micro cable. (434)
• When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return
to the status before the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you
take or play back pictures.
• Even if [Effect] and [Sound] are set on this unit, these settings are disabled
when the pictures are played back on a TV during Slide Show playback.
• Video and 4K burst files cannot be played back.
• The pictures displayed on “Multi Playback” screen or some screens of the
camera are not displayed on the TV.
• When [Auto Transfer] in the [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is
disabled.
400
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Sending Images from the Camera
Operate the camera to send recorded images to a device connected by
Wi-Fi.
Operation flow
1
Select the sending method.
Select the sending method from the [Send Images
While Recording] and [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] camera menus.
2
Select the destination (type of the
destination device).
– [Smartphone] (404)
– [PC] (407)
– [Printer] (410)
– [AV device] (412)
– [Web service] (414)
– [Cloud Sync. Service] (416)
3
Select the connection method and then
connect by Wi-Fi.
– [Via Network] (418)
– [Direct] (421)
4
Check the send settings.
– Image send settings (424)
5
[Send Images While Recording]
[Send Images Stored in the
Camera]
Take pictures.
This automatically sends the
recorded pictures as they are taken.
Select an image.
Send the selected images.
401
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Refer to the following pages for the steps common to all devices.
– Wi-Fi connections: [Via Network] (418)/[Direct] (421)
– Image send settings (424)
– Selecting images (426)
• When recording, recording is prioritized so it will take time for sending to
complete.
• If the camera is turned off, or the Wi-Fi is disconnected before sending is
completed, then sending will not restart.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the [Playback] menu while
sending.
• The camera is disconnected from Wi-Fi during [Time Lapse Shot] recording.
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not
available.
402
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Images That Can be Sent
Images that can be sent differ depending on the destination device.
Destination device
Images that can be sent
[Send Images While
Recording]
[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
[Smartphone] (404)
JPEG/RAW JPEG/RAW/MP4
*
1
[PC] (407)
JPEG/RAW
JPEG/RAW/MP4/
4K burst files/
Post-Focus images
[Cloud Sync. Service]
(416)
JPEG JPEG/MP4
[Web service] (414)
JPEG/RAW
*
2
JPEG/MP4/RAW
*
2
[AV device] (412)
JPEG JPEG
[Printer] (410)
— JPEG
*
1 Files larger than 4 GB cannot be sent.
*
2 Sending is possible when the destination web service supports the sending of
RAW images from this camera.
• You will need an Android with an operating system of 7.0 or higher to send/save
RAW images to an Android device. The pictures, however, may not be displayed
correctly on some smartphones or some versions of operating systems.
• 4K videos cannot be sent to [Cloud Sync. Service], and [Web service].
• Sending may not be possible depending on your device.
• It may not be possible to send images recorded with devices other than this
camera, or images edited or processed on a PC.
403
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Fn Button Assigned with [Wi-Fi]
You can perform the following operations by pressing the Fn button
assigned with [Wi-Fi] after connecting to Wi-Fi.
For information on Fn buttons, refer to page 292.
[Terminate the
Connection]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to
select a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for
Sending Images]
Sets the image size, file format, and other items for
sending recorded images. (424)
[Register the Current
Destination to Favorite]
Registers the current connection destination or
method so that you can easily connect with the same
connection settings next time.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the
camera. (428)
• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may
not be able to perform some of these operations.
404
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Smartphone]
Transfer recorded images to a smartphone connected using Wi-Fi.
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (374)
1
Select the method for sending
the images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to
[Smartphone].
3
Connect the camera to a
smartphone by Wi-Fi.
● Select [Via Network] (418) or
[Direct] (421), and then connect.
4
On the smartphone, start up “LUMIX Sync”.
5
Select the destination smartphone on the camera.
405
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
6
Check the send settings and then press .
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (424)
7
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
406
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Sending Images on the Camera to a Smartphone with
Simple Operations
You can transfer pictures to a smartphone connected by Bluetooth just by
pressing [
] ([Send Image (Smartphone)]) button during playback.
You can also use the menu to connect easily.
• Use the Fn button registered with [Send Image (Smartphone)] to operate. In default
settings, this is registered in [Fn4].
For information about the Fn button, refer to page 292.
Getting started:
• Install “LUMIX Sync” on your smartphone. (374)
• Connect the camera to a smartphone by Bluetooth. (375)
• Press [
] on the camera to display the playback screen.
Send a single image
Press to select the image.
Press [ ].
Select [Single Select].
• To change the send settings of
images, press [DISP.]. (424)
On the smartphone, select [Yes]
(for Android devices) or [Join]
(for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using
Wi-Fi.
Send multiple images
Press [ ].
Select [Multi Select].
• To change the send settings of
images, press [DISP.]. (424)
Select the images and then
transfer.
: Select images
: Set/Cancel
[DISP.]: Transfer
On the smartphone, select [Yes]
(for Android devices) or [Join]
(for iOS devices).
• This connects automatically using
Wi-Fi.
407
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Using the menu to transfer easily
[ ] [Bluetooth] [Send Image (Smartphone)]
Settings: [Single Select]/[Multi Select]
• If [Single Select], press to select the image and then press to execute.
• If [Multi Select], use the same operation as with “Send multiple images”.
• This function is not available when [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to
[ON].
[PC]
Send recorded images to the PC connected with Wi-Fi.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
Getting started:
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting,
change the corresponding setting of the camera in [PC Connection]. (427)
Create a Destination Folder for Images
When using Windows (Example for Windows 10)
Select the destination folder and then right-click.
Select [Properties] and then enable folder sharing.
• You can also use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to create folders.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
408
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
When using Mac (Example for OS X v10.14)
Select the destination folder and then click the items in the following
order.
[File]
[Get Info]
Enable folder sharing.
• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters) consisting of alphanumeric characters.
A destination folder may not be created if the account name includes non-
alphanumeric characters.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of
15 or less alphanumeric characters.
• Refer to the operating instructions for your PC or Help on the OS for
detailed setting procedures.
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [PC].
409
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
3
Connect the camera and PC by
Wi-Fi.
● Select [Via Network] (418) or
[Direct] (421), and then connect.
4
Enter the computer name
of the PC name you want
to connect to (for Mac, the
NetBIOS name).
5
Select a folder for storing
images.
• Folders sorted by sent date will be
created in the selected folder, and images
will be saved there.
6
Check the send settings and then press .
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (424)
410
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
7
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one
you set on your PC.
• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to
the PC may not be possible.
[Printer]
You can send images to a PictBridge (wireless LAN)
*
1
-supported printer
connected by Wi-Fi for printing.
*
1 DPS over IP standard-compliant
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images Stored
in the Camera]
411
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
2
Set the destination to [Printer].
3
Connect the camera to a
printer by Wi-Fi.
● Select [Via Network] (418) or
[Direct] (421), and then connect.
4
Select the destination printer.
5
Select and print images.
• The procedure for selecting images is the same as the one for when the USB
connection cable is connected. (444)
• To terminate the connection, press [
].
• For details about PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printers, contact
their manufacturers.
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not
available.
412
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[AV device]
Still pictures and video can be sent to AV devices in the home (home AV
devices), such as DLNA compatible recorders.
Home AV device
Wireless access point
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [AV
device].
3
Connect the camera and PC by
Wi-Fi.
● Select [Via Network] (418) or
[Direct] (421), and then connect.
4
Select the device you wish to connect to.
413
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
5
Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press the [DISP.]. (424)
6
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also,
sending may take a while.
• When [Auto Transfer] in the [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is
disabled.
414
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Web service]
You can use “LUMIX CLUB” to upload recorded images to web services
such as social networking sites.
Getting started:
• Register with “LUMIX CLUB”. (428)
• Before sending images to a service, register that web service. (430)
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Web
service].
3
Connect to the web service.
● Select [Via Network] and then
connect. (418)
4
Select the web service.
5
Check the send settings and
then press
.
• To change the send settings of images,
press [DISP.]. (424)
415
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
6
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select an image.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
• If image sending fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the
email address registered in the “LUMIX CLUB”.
• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the
leakage, loss, etc. of images uploaded on web services.
• When uploading images to a web service, do not delete images from the
camera, even after they have finished sending, until you have checked that
they have been properly uploaded to the web service.
Panasonic assumes no responsibility for any damages resulting from the
deletion of images stored on the camera.
• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such
as recording dates and times, and location information. Check carefully
when uploading the images to a web service.
416
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Cloud Sync. Service]
This camera can automatically transfer recorded images to a cloud sync
service via “LUMIX CLUB” to send them to a PC or smartphone.
To use [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of June 2020)
• You need to register to the “LUMIX CLUB” (428) and set up cloud
synchronization to send images to a cloud folder.
To set up cloud synchronization, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder. These can be
synchronized with your PC, smartphone, and other devices.
• A cloud folder stores sent images for 30 days (up to 1000 images).
Please note that the images will be deleted automatically in the following
cases:
– If 30 days have passed after sending (even if within 30 days of the
transfer, if images have been downloaded to all specified devices, then
these may be deleted)
– If there are in excess of 1000 images (depending on the [Cloud Limit]
(425) setting)
1
Select the method for sending
images on the camera.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[New
Connection]
[Send Images While
Recording]/[Send Images Stored in
the Camera]
2
Set the destination to [Cloud
Sync. Service].
417
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
3
Connect to the cloud sync
service.
● Select [Via Network] and then
connect. (418)
4
Check the send settings and then press .
• To change the send settings of images, press [DISP.]. (424)
5
When [Send Images While Recording] is selected:
Take pictures.
• [ ] is displayed in the recording screen of the camera while a file is being
sent.
• To end the connection, follow the steps below:
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Yes]
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] is selected:
Select one or more images.
• To end the connection, select [Exit].
418
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi Connections
When [New Connection] has been
selected in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] of
the [Setup] menu, select the connection
method from either [Via Network] or
[Direct] to connect.
On the other hand, when you use [Select
a destination from History] or [Select a
destination from Favorite], the camera
connects to the selected device with the
previously-used settings.
[Via Network]
Connect the camera and destination device through the wireless access
point.
Select the method for connecting
to a wireless access point.
Settings: [WPS (Push-Button)]/[WPS (PIN
code)]/[From List] (419)
• After selecting [Via Network] once, the camera will connect to the
previously-used wireless access point.
To change the wireless access point used for connection, press [DISP.] and
change the connection destination.
• Check the operating instructions and settings of the wireless access point.
419
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access
point to set up a connection.
Press the wireless access point WPS button
until it switches to WPS mode.
Example)
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a connection.
On the camera screen, select the wireless access point you are
connecting to.
Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen into the wireless
access point.
Press of the camera.
420
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[From List]
Searches for a wireless access point to use, and connects to this.
• Confirm the encryption key of the wireless access point.
Select the wireless access point you
are connecting to.
• Press [DISP.] to run a wireless access point
search again.
• If no wireless access point is found, refer to
“Connecting by Manual Input” on page 420.
(If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key.
Connecting by Manual Input
• Check the SSID, network authentication, encryption, and encryption key of
the wireless access point you are using.
In the screen in Step of “[From List]”, select [Manual Input]. (420)
Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, and
then select [Set].
Select the network authentication.
[WPA2-PSK]
Supported encryption: [TKIP], [AES]
[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
[No Encryption] —
(When other than [No Encryption] is selected)
Enter the encryption key and then select [Set].
421
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Direct]
Directly connect the camera and the destination device.
Select the method for connecting
with the destination device.
[WPS
Connection]
[WPS (Push-
Button)]
Press the WPS button on the destination
device to connect.
• On the camera, press [DISP.] to extend
the connection wait time.
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter the PIN code into the camera, and
connect.
[Manual
Connection]
Search for the camera on the destination device to connect.
Enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera into the
device.
• If the destination is set to [Smartphone],
the password is not displayed. Select the
SSID to establish a connection. (380)
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the device to be
connected.
422
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connect to Wi-Fi Using Previously Saved Settings
Use the Wi-Fi connection history to connect using the same settings as
previously.
1
Display the Wi-Fi connection
history.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function]
[Select a
destination from History]/[Select a
destination from Favorite]
2
Select the History item to
connect to.
• Press [DISP.] to confirm details of the
connection history.
Register to Favorite
You can register the Wi-Fi connection history to Favorite.
Display the Wi-Fi connection history.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination from History]
Select the History item to register and then press .
Enter a registration name and then select [Set].
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as
two characters.
423
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Editing Items Registered in Favorite
Display items registered to Favorite.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function] [Select a destination from Favorite]
Select the History item to edit in Favorite and then press .
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in
Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item
to change the display order.
[Change the Registered
Name]
Enter characters to change the registered name.
• The number of items that can be saved in History is limited. Register
frequently-used connection settings to Favorite.
• When [Reset] in the [Setup] menu is used to reset the network settings, the
content registered in History and Favorite is deleted.
• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a
wireless access point other than the camera, you cannot connect the device
to the camera using [Direct].
Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the
access point to be used is set to the camera. You can also select [New
Connection] and reconnect the devices. (380)
• It may be difficult to connect to networks to which many devices are
connected. In these cases, connect using [New Connection].
424
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Send Settings and Selecting Images
Image Send Settings
Set the size, file format, and other items for sending the image to the
destination device.
1
After Wi-Fi connection, the
send settings confirmation
screen will be displayed, so
press [DISP.].
2
Change the send settings.
425
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([M], [S], or [VGA])
• The [Auto] image size changes depending on the
status of the destination device.
(This can be set when the destination is [Web
service])
[File Format]
Sets the file format of images to send.
[JPG]/[RAW+JPG]/[RAW]
• This setting is possible when the destination supports
the sending of RAW images from this camera.
(402)
[Delete Location Data]
Select whether to delete the location information from
images before sending them.
• This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.
Service] or [Web service].
• This operation only deletes the location information
from the images that are set to be sent.
[Cloud Limit]
You can select whether to send images when the cloud
folder runs out of free space.
[ON]: Does not send images.
[OFF]: Deletes images from the oldest ones, then
sends new images.
• This can be set when the destination is [Cloud Sync.
Service].
426
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Selecting Images
When sending by [Send Images Stored in the Camera], select the images
using the following procedure.
1
Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
2
Select the image.
[Single Select] setting
Press to select an image.
SetSet
Press .
[Multi Select] setting
Press to select an image and
then press
. (Repeat this)
• To cancel the setting, press again.
2 3
4 5 6
1
OKOK
Press [DISP.] to execute.
427
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
This configures the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Displaying the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu.
● [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote
Device]
This sets either the camera or the smartphone as
the priority control device to be used during remote
recording. (388)
[Wi-Fi Password]
You can use a password to connect for enhanced
security. (382)
[LUMIX CLUB]
This acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
(429)
[PC Connection]
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, you need to connect to the
same workgroup as the destination PC.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
• To change the workgroup name, press
and enter
the new workgroup name.
• To return to the default settings, press [DISP.].
[Device Name]
You can change the name (SSID) of the camera.
• To change the SSID name, press [DISP.] and enter the
new SSID name.
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
428
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-
Fi function by a third party and to protect personal
information in the camera and included with images,
protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
[Setup]: Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
[Cancel]: Cancel the password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it
each time you use the Wi-Fi function.
• If you forget your password, you can use [Reset
Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu to reset the
network settings and thereby reset the password.
[Network Address]
Displays the MAC address and IP address of the
camera.
“LUMIX CLUB”
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected
troubles, and the service contents may be changed or added, without prior
notice to the users.
The service may also be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable
period of advance notice.
429
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Acquire a New Login ID from the Camera
From the camera menu, acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
Follow the menu path.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[LUMIX CLUB]
[Set/Add Account]
[New account]
• Connect to the network.
Proceed to the next page by selecting
[Next].
Select and set the method for connecting to a wireless access point,
and set. (418)
• Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the previously-
used wireless access point.
To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and then select [Agree].
• Switch pages:
• Zoom: Rotate to the right (to restore: rotate to the left)
• Move the enlarged area:
• Cancel without registering: [ ]
Enter a password.
• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
Check the login ID and then select [OK].
• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and
password.
• The login ID (12-digit number) will be
displayed automatically.
430
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Register a Web Service with “LUMIX CLUB”
• Confirm web services supported by “LUMIX CLUB” in “FAQ/Contact us” at
the following site:
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
Getting started:
• Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use,
and have the login information available.
Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or PC.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password to log in.
• If you have not registered your email address to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, please
register it.
Select and register the web service you want to use for web service link
settings.
• Follow the on-screen instructions to perform the registration.
Confirm/Change Login ID or Password
Getting started:
• When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.
• Access the “LUMIX CLUB” site from your PC to change the password.
Follow the menu path.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup]
[LUMIX CLUB]
[Set/Add Account] [Set
Login ID]
• The login ID and password are displayed.
• The password is displayed as “
*
”.
Select the item to change.
Enter the login ID or password.
Select [Exit].
431
14. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Checking the “LUMIX CLUB” Terms of Use
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated, for example.
[ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [LUMIX CLUB] Select [Terms of
use]
Deleting Your Login ID and Closing Your “LUMIX CLUB”
Account
Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party
or disposing of it.
You can also close your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
• You can only change or delete the login ID acquired with the camera.
Follow the menu path.
• [ ] [Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Setup] [LUMIX CLUB] [Delete account]
• A message is displayed. Select [Next].
Select [Yes] on the login ID delete confirmation screen.
• A message is displayed. Select [Next].
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen asking whether to close the
“LUMIX CLUB” account.
• A message is displayed. Select [Next].
• To continue without closing the account, select [No] to delete only the login ID.
Select [OK].
432
15. Connecting to Other Devices
This chapter describes connections with other devices, such as TVs and
PCs.
[HDMI] socket
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially available HDMI micro
cable.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D - Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
433
15. Connecting to Other Devices
[USB/CHARGE] socket
Use a USB connection cable to connect the camera to a PC, recorder, or
printer.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the
plug. (Inserting these at an angle may cause deformation or malfunction)
• Do not connect the cable to the wrong terminals. This may cause a
malfunction.
434
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Viewing on a TV
You can connect the camera to a TV to view recorded pictures and videos
on the TV.
Getting started:
• Turn off the camera and TV.
1
Connect the camera and TV with a commercially
available HDMI micro cable. (432)
2
Turn on the TV.
3
Switch the TV input to HDMI input.
4
Turn on the camera.
5
Display the playback screen.
● Press [ ].
● The recorded images are displayed
on the TV. (The monitor and
viewfinder of the camera will turn
off.)
435
15. Connecting to Other Devices
• With the default settings, pictures are output at the optimal resolution for the
connected TV.
The output resolution can be changed in [HDMI Mode (Play)]. (357)
• To play back 24p videos, set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to [AUTO]. Otherwise, the
picture is not output at 24 frames per second.
• Depending on the aspect ratio, gray bands may be displayed on the top and
bottom or the left and right of images.
• Wi-Fi connection is not available while using the HDMI output.
• Some of setting screens are not output through the HDMI connection.
• HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable is connected
simultaneously.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if images are displayed with the top or
bottom cut off.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
Using VIERA Link
VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) is a function that allows you to use your
remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations when the camera
has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI
micro cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• To use VIERA Link, you need to also configure the settings on the TV.
For the setting procedure, refer to the operating instructions for the TV.
436
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Connect the camera to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link
using a commercially available HDMI micro cable. (432)
Turn on the camera.
Turn on the VIERA Link.
• [ ] [TV Connection] [VIERA Link] [ON]
Display the playback screen.
• Press [ ].
Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Power off link
If you turn off the TV with its remote control, the camera will also turn off.
Automatic input switching
If you turn on the camera and then press [ ], the input of the TV automatically
switches to input to which this camera is connected.
Furthermore, when the TV power is in the standby state, it turns on automatically.
(When “Power on link” on the TV is set to “Set”)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function
using the standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other
companies are not guaranteed.
• The camera supports “VIERA Link Ver.5”. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard
for Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible devices. This standard is compatible
with Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link devices.
• Operation using the buttons on the camera will be limited.
437
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Recording while monitoring camera images
When using the HDMI output, you can
take pictures while monitoring the camera
image on a TV, etc.
• The monitor and viewfinder of the camera will turn off.
• When using the AF mode [
] or MF assist, the screen cannot be enlarged
in windowed mode.
• The aspect ratio setting is fixed to [16:9].
• An electronic sound or shutter sound will not sound.
• Wi-Fi connection is not available while using the HDMI output.
• Some of setting screens are not output through the HDMI connection.
• When the following functions are being used, HDMI output is not available:
– Video recording, [4K PHOTO], [Post Focus]
• You can change the recording information to be outputted via HDMI, from
constant display to display only during operations or not to be displayed:
[
] [TV Connection] [HDMI Info Display (Rec)] (358)
438
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Importing Images to a PC
If you connect the camera to a PC, you can copy the recorded images to
the PC.
• When using Windows, you can also copy using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” software
for LUMIX. (441)
• When using Mac, you can copy using “iMovie”.
For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.
Copying Images to a PC
• The camera can be connected to a PC running any of the following OSs
which can detect mass storage devices.
Supported OS
Windows: Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Mac: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and PC.
1
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection
cable. (433)
2
Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .
● Windows: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed in [This PC].
● Mac: A drive (“LUMIX”) is displayed on the desktop.
3
Drag the files and folders from the camera to the PC.
439
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Folder Structure Inside Card
LUMIX
DCIM
100XXXXX
PXX
X0001.JPG
DCIM: Images
Folder number
Color space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
File number
JPG: JPEG format pictures
RW2: RAW format pictures
MP4: MP4 videos,
4K burst files
440
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Copying Images to a PC Using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and PC.
• Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” on PC. (440)
Connect the camera and PC with the USB connection cable. (433)
Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .
Copy images to the PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• Do not delete or move the copied files and folders in, for example, Windows
Explorer.
Playback and editing using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” will become no longer
possible.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera will
be automatically connected to the PC without the [USB Mode] selection
screen being displayed. (357)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while images are being imported.
• After importing of the images is completed, perform the operation to safely
remove the USB connection cable on the PC.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
Installing Software
Install the software to perform operations such as organizing and
correcting recorded images, processing RAW images, and editing videos.
• To download the software, your PC needs to be able to connect to the
internet.
• Supported OS versions as of June 2020. Supported OS versions may be
changed without prior notice.
441
15. Connecting to Other Devices
PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.0 AE
This software allows you to manage your images. For example, it allows
you to import pictures and videos to your PC and then sort them by
recording date, model name.
You can also perform operations such as writing images to a DVD,
correcting images, and editing videos.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs10ae.html
(English only)
Download expiration: July 2025
Operating environment
Supported OS
Windows 10 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows 8.1 (32-bit/64-bit)
• For 4K videos and 4K photos, a 64-bit version of the
Windows 10/Windows 8.1 OS is required.
CPU Pentium
®
4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Display 1024×768 or higher (1920×1080 or higher is recommended)
Installed memory 1 GB or more for 32-bit, 2 GB or more for 64-bit
Free hard disk
space
450 MB or more for installing the software
• A high-performance PC environment is required to use the playback and editing
functions for 4K videos or the picture cropping function for 4K photos.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not available for Mac.
442
15. Connecting to Other Devices
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
This software processes and edits RAW images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be
displayed on a PC.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
Operating environment
Supported OS
Windows
Windows 10 (64-bit recommended)
Windows 8.1 (64-bit recommended)
Mac
OS X v10.10 to v10.11
macOS 10.12 to macOS 10.15
• For more information such as how to use “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the
Help or the Ichikawa Soft Laboratory’s support site.
30-Day Full Trial Version of “LoiLoScope” (Free)
This software allows you to easily edit videos.
Check the following site and then download and install the software:
http://loilo.tv/product/20
Operating environment
Supported OS Windows
Windows 10
Windows 8.1
Windows 8
• For more information on how to use “LoiLoScope”, refer to the “LoiLoScope”
manual available for download at the site.
• “LoiLoScope” is not available for Mac.
443
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Storing on a Recorder
By connecting the camera to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD
recorder, you can store the pictures and videos.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and recorder.
1
Connect the camera and recorder with the USB
connection cable. (433)
2
Press to select [PC(Storage)] and then press .
3
Operate the recorder to store the images.
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the recorder without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (357)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while storage is in progress.
• Images such as 4K videos may not be supported depending on your
recorder.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
• For the storage and playback procedures, refer to the operating instructions
for the recorder.
444
15. Connecting to Other Devices
Printing
If you connect the camera to a printer that supports PictBridge, you can
select pictures on the camera’s monitor and then print them.
Getting started:
• Turn on the camera and printer.
• Set the print quality and other settings on the printer.
1
Display the playback screen.
● Press [ ].
2
Connect the camera and printer with the USB connection
cable. (433)
3
Press to select [PictBridge(PTP)] and then press .
4
Press to select a picture
and then press
.
● To print multiple pictures, press ,
set the picture selection method,
and then select pictures.
Multi Print
Print
[Multi Select]
Selects the picture to print.
1
Press to select a picture and then press .
• To cancel the setting, press
again.
2
Press [DISP.] to end selection.
[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.
[Rating]
Prints all pictures with [Rating] levels from [★1] to [★5].
445
15. Connecting to Other Devices
5
Set the print settings.
[Print with Date]
Sets printing with date.
• If the printer does not support printing with date, the date
cannot be printed.
[Num.of prints] Sets the number of prints to be printed (up to 999).
[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.
[Page Layout]
Sets whether to add borders and how many images to be
printed on each sheet of paper.
6
Start printing.
● Select [Print start] and then press
.
446
15. Connecting to Other Devices
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in the [Setup] menu, the camera
will be automatically connected to the printer without the [USB Mode]
selection screen being displayed. (357)
• Take care not to turn off the camera while printing is in progress.
• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [
] (Cable disconnect
prohibit icon) is displayed.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
• Turn off the camera and disconnect the USB connection cable before
removing the card from the camera. Otherwise, the recorded data may be
damaged.
• To print images with paper size and layout settings not supported by the
camera, set the [Paper Size] and [Page Layout] to [
] and then select the
desired settings on the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for your printer.)
• If a yellow [
] is displayed, the camera is receiving an error message from
the printer. Check that there is no problem with the printer.
• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed in batches. In this
case, the remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number
set.
• You cannot print RAW images.
• Images recorded with the following functions cannot be printed:
– Video recording, [4K Burst], [Post Focus]
447
16. Materials
Using Optional Accessories
• For information on the tripod grip, refer to page 70.
External Flash (optional)
After attaching the flash (DMW-FL580L, DMW-FL360L,
DMW-FL200L: optional), the effective range will be
increased when compared to the camera’s built-in
flash.
1
Close the built-in flash and set the Camera on/off switch
to [OFF].
2
Attach the external flash to the hot shoe and then turn on
the camera and the external flash.
• Refer to (236) for changing the settings for external flashes on the camera.
• Refer to (234) about the settings for the wireless flash.
Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
Before attaching the Flash (optional), remove the hot shoe cover.
Refer to the operating instructions for the Flash for details about how to
attach it.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the direction
indicated by arrow
while pressing it in the direction
indicated by arrow
.
448
16. Materials
• When an external flash is attached, do not carry the camera by holding only
the external flash. It may become detached.
• When using a commercially available external flash, do not use one with
reversed polarity or function for communicating with a camera.
It may cause the camera to malfunction, or it may not operate correctly.
• If you take pictures close to the subject while taking wide-angle pictures, the
light of the flash is obstructed by the lens and the bottom of the screen may
be dark.
• Refer to the operating instructions of the external flash for further details.
External Microphones (Optional)
With a Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-
MS2: optional) or Stereo Microphone
(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record
higher-quality audio compared to the built-
in microphone.
1
Close the built-in flash and set the Camera on/off switch
to [OFF].
2
Connect the camera and
external microphone.
• Remove the hot shoe cover. (447)
• Insert the cord in the direction shown in
the figure.
• If the cord has too much slack, you can
secure it by tucking it into the cord holder.
449
16. Materials
• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the
screen. Make sure that the external microphone is connected properly
before you start recording.
• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet)
or more.
• When an external microphone is connected, [Sound Rec Level Disp.]
automatically turns [ON], and the recording level is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is attached, do not carry the camera by
holding the external microphone. It may become detached.
• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not open the
built-in flash.
• If noises are recorded when using the AC adaptor, use the battery.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the external microphone.
450
16. Materials
Setting the Sound Pickup Range (DMW-MS2: Optional)
When the Stereo Shotgun Microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) is
connected, you can set the microphone sound pickup range.
Select [Special Mic.].
● [ ] [Special Mic.]
[STEREO] Picks up sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO]
Picks up sound from a range automatically set by the lens
angle of view.
[SHOTGUN]
Helps prevent picking up background noise, and records
sound from a specific direction.
[S.SHOTGUN]
Narrows the sound pickup range more than with
[SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL] Sets the range manually for sound pickup.
(When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press
to adjust the sound pickup range and then press .
• You can register the [MANUAL] sound pickup range setting in an Fn button:
[
] [ ] [Fn Button Set] [Setting in REC mode] [Special Mic.
Directivity Adjust] (293)
Reduction of Wind Noise
This reduces wind noise when an external microphone is connected.
[ ] Select [Wind Cut]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
451
16. Materials
AC Adaptor (Optional)/DC Coupler (Optional)
With an AC Adaptor (DMW-AC10: optional) and DC Coupler (DMW-
DCC11: optional), you can perform recording and playback without
worrying about the remaining battery charge.
• Be sure to purchase both an AC Adaptor and a DC Coupler as a set.
They cannot be used independently of one another.
• When the DC Coupler is being mounted, the DC Coupler cover opens, so
the structure ceases to be dust and splash resistant.
Do not allow sand, dust and water droplets to adhere to or enter the camera.
After use, confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the DC Coupler
cover, then firmly close the cover.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions for the AC Adaptor and DC
Coupler.
452
16. Materials
60
p
Monitor/Viewfinder Displays
• The screen is an monitor display example of when [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] is set
to [
].
Recording Screen
Recording mode (52)
Photo Style (221)
Flash mode (227)
Flash setting (232, 234)
Extended Tele Conversion
(when recording video)
(154)
Recording quality (239)
[Snap Movie] (255)
[Aspect Ratio] (117)/
[Picture Size] (118)
Extended Tele Conversion
(152)
[Quality] (119)
[S&Q Effect] (254)
AFS AFF
AFC MF
Focus mode (124, 146)
Focus Bracket (199)
AFL
AF Lock (210)
AF mode (129)
[Face Recog.] (349)
Drive mode (157)
Battery indication (35)
Automatic switching
between viewfinder and
monitor (56)
Focus Peaking (342)
[Highlight Shadow]
(316)
[HDR] (323)/
[iHDR] (312)
453
16. Materials
Live View Composite
recording (101)
Multiple exposures
(325)
[Digital Zoom] (155)
Electronic shutter (202)
Picture-taking during
video recording (Photo
Priority) (242)
Temperature rise warning
icon (463)
Image stabilizer (204)
Camera shake alert
(206)
Pre-Burst recording
(165)
Focus (turns green)
(50)/
Recording state (turns
red) (238)
Focus (in low light AF
situations) (127)
Focus (Starlight AF)
(127)
Filter setting (224)
Filter effect adjustment
(111, 224)
Card (displayed only
during recording) (39)
XXmXXs
Elapsed recording time
(238)
Simultaneous recording
indicator (243)
Name
*
1
(349)
Travel elapsed days
*
2
(353)
Location
*
2
(353)
Age in years/months
*
1
(349)
Current date/time
*
2
Travel destination setting
*
2
:
(352)
Exposure meter (345)
Focal distance display (156)
Step zoom (156)
Image being sent (393)
AF area (129)
Spot metering target
(207)
Center marker (344)
Self-timer (184)
Histogram (343)
Audio recording level
display (263)
Built-in microphone setting
(86, 265)
External microphone
(448)
Silent mode (201)
Metering mode (207)
AEL
AE Lock (210)
60
Shutter speed (50)
F3.5
Aperture value (50)
3.5
Aperture Bracket (198)
454
16. Materials
*
1 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile
Setup] setting is set.
*
2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting
the clock and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording mode.
Exposure compensation
value (208)
Exposure Bracket (198)
Brightness (exposure)
(81, 115)
Manual Exposure Assist
(99)
ISO sensitivity (212)
AWBc
AWBw
White balance (215)
White Balance Bracket
(200)
Adjusting the white
balance (219)
Coloring (81)
Connected to Wi-Fi
(371)
Connected to Bluetooth
(377)
Location logging (395)
98
Number of pictures that
can be taken (487)
r20
Number of pictures that
can be taken continuously
(160)
RXXmXXs
Available recording time
(487)
----- No card
455
16. Materials
Touch Tab (339)
Touch Zoom (153)
Touch AF, Touch Shutter (68)
Touch AE (69)
Focus Peaking (342)
Self Shot Mode (83)
Fn button (296)
/ / / /
Coloring (81)
Defocus control function
(82, 115)
Brightness (exposure)
(81, 115)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect]) (113)
One Point Color (114)
Light source position
([Sunshine]) (114)
Filter effect adjustment
(116, 224)
Filter on/off (224)
Filter setting (224)
Aperture value (246, 252)
Shutter speed (246, 252)
Exposure compensation
(246, 252)
ISO sensitivity (246, 252)
Sound recording level
adjustment (246)
[S&Q Effect] (252)
Scene Guide Mode
[Clear Portrait]
([Soft Skin], [Slimming Mode])
(107)
456
16. Materials
F3.51/60
Monitor recording information screen
Recording mode (52)
1/60
Shutter speed (50)
F3.5
Aperture value (50)
Battery indication (35)
ISO sensitivity (212)
Exposure compensation
value (208)/
Manual Exposure Assist
(99)
Flash setting (231, 232,
234)/
Flash mode (227)
Drive mode (157)
AFS
Focus mode (124, 146)
AF mode (129)
[Quality] (119)
Recording quality (239)
[Aspect Ratio] (117)/
[Picture Size] (118)
[S&Q Effect] (254)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection state (371)
Fn button settings (292)
Photo Style (221)
AWB
White balance (215)
[i.Dynamic] (317)
Metering mode (207)
98
Number of pictures that
can be taken (487)
r20
Number of pictures that
can be taken continuously
(160)
RXXmXXs
Available recording time
(487)
---- No card
457
16. Materials
15 pic.15 pic.
1ST DAY
1ST DAY
11 months 20 days
11 months 20 days
Playback Screen
Playback mode (361)
Protected picture (362)
Location logging (395)
Rating (362)
Cable disconnect prohibit
icon (446)
Video playback (272)
Saving pictures from a 4K
burst file (168)
Saving pictures from a
Post-Focus image (179)
Text stamped display
(365)
XXmXXs
Elapsed playback time
(272)
Icon indicating the
presence of a marker
(170, 172)
4K Photo (4K burst file)
(162)
[Post Focus] (176)
[Focus Stacking] (181)
[Aspect Ratio] (117)/
[Picture Size] (118)
Recording quality (239)
[Snap Movie] (255)
[Quality] (119)
[S&Q Effect] (254)
Battery indication (35)
1/98
Image number/Total
number of images
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
connection state (371)
15 pic. Number of group images
XXmXXs
Video recording time
(272)
XXmXXs
XXmXXs
S&Q playback time/
recording time (254)
458
16. Materials
Clear Retouch completed
icon (284)
Obtaining information
Playback (Video) (272)
1ST DAY
Travel elapsed days
(353)
Group images (278)
Silent mode (201)
*
1 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]),
[Name] ([Face Recog.]).
Name
*
1
(349, 351)
Location
*
1
(353)
Title
*
1
(363)
Age in years/months (349, 351)
Recording information
459
16. Materials
1/5
100-0001
2020.12.1 10:00
3/5
100-0001
Standard
Contrast
Sharpness
Noise Reduction
Saturation
2020.12.1 10:00
4/5
A B
G
M
2020.12.1 10:00
100-0001
Auto White Balance
5/5
2020.12.1 10:00
100-0001
Focal Length
12mm
Long Shtr NR
OFF
Shading Comp.
OFF
35mm Focal Length
24mm
LUMIX G VARIO 12-32
/F3.5-5.6
2/5
R
G
B
Y
2020.12.1 10:00
100-0001
Detailed information display
Photo style,
Highlight shadow display
White balance display
Lens information displayHistogram display
Recording information (basic)
Recording date and time (45)
Folder/file number (439)
Recording information (advanced)
460
16. Materials
Message Displays
Meanings of main messages displayed on the camera screen, and
response methods.
Card
[Memory Card Error]/[Format this card?]
• It is a format that cannot be used with the camera.
Either insert another card, or back up any necessary data before formatting. (40)
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
• Use a card compatible with the camera. (24)
[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]
• Unable to access the card. Reinsert the card.
• Insert a different card.
[Read Error]/[Write Error]/[Please check the card]
• Failure to read or write data.
Turn off the camera, reinsert the card, and then turn it on again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of
the card]
• Insufficient card write speed. Use a card of a supported Speed Class. (24)
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the specified
Speed Class rating, the data writing speed of the card is getting slow. We
recommend backing up data, and formatting (40).
461
16. Materials
Lens
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button
while lens is attached.]
• Remove the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release
button. (41)
Turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached
correctly.]
• Remove the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens
and the camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn on the camera again, and if it is still displaying, contact the
dealer.
Battery
[This battery cannot be used]
• Use a genuine Panasonic battery.
If this message is displayed even when a genuine Panasonic battery is used,
contact the dealer.
• If the terminal of the battery is dirty, remove the dirt and dust from the terminal.
462
16. Materials
Others
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]
• Images that do not comply with the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (40)
[A folder cannot be created]
• The maximum number of folder numbers has been reached, so new folders cannot
be created.
Back up any necessary data before formatting the card. (40)
After formatting, execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu to reset the folder number
to 100. (123)
[Please turn camera off and then on again]/[System Error]
• Turn off and on the camera.
If the message is displayed even when doing this several times, contact the dealer.
463
16. Materials
Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (463 to 473).
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting
[Reset] (67) on the [Setup] menu.
Power, Battery
The camera turns off automatically.
• [Economy] is enabled. (37)
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
• When [4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster. Set
these settings only when recording.
• When connected to Wi-Fi, the battery drains quickly.
Turn the camera off frequently such as by using [Economy] (37).
Recording
Recording stops before finishing.
Cannot record.
Cannot use some functions.
• In high ambient temperatures or if the camera is used for continuous recording, the
temperature of the camera will rise.
To protect the camera against a rise in temperature, after [
] is displayed,
recording will be stopped, and the following functions will not be available for a
time. Wait until the camera cools down.
– [4K PHOTO]
– [Post Focus]
– Video recording
464
16. Materials
Cannot record images.
The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is
pressed.
• If [Focus/Release Priority] is set to [FOCUS], then recording will not take place until
focus is achieved. (334)
The recorded image is whitish.
• Images may look whitish when the lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints
or similar.
If the lens is dirty, turn the camera off, then wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
For information about how to clean the image sensor, refer to page 475.
The recorded image is too bright or dark.
• Ensure AE Lock is not set where it is not appropriate. (210)
Multiple images are recorded at once.
• When drive mode is set to [ ] (Burst), pressing and holding the shutter button
will take burst pictures. (157)
• When [Bracket] is set, then pressing the shutter button records multiple images
while automatically changing the settings. (195)
The subject is not focused properly.
• Confirm the following details:
– Is the subject outside of the focus range?
– Is [Shutter AF] set to [OFF]? (331)
– Is [Focus/Release Priority] set to [RELEASE]? (334)
– Is AF Lock (210) set where it is not appropriate?
The recorded image is blurred.
The image stabilizer is not effective.
• The shutter speed will become slower and the image stabilizer function may not
work properly when recording in dark places.
In these cases, use a tripod and the self-timer when recording.
465
16. Materials
The recorded image looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
• Try the following:
– Reduce the ISO sensitivity. (212)
– Increase [Noise Reduction] of [Photo Style] to the positive direction, or adjust
each item other than [Noise Reduction] to the negative direction. (222)
– Set [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (320)
The subject appears distorted on the image.
• When a moving subject is recorded while using the following functions, the subject
may appear distorted in the picture:
– [ESHTR]
– Video recording
– [4K PHOTO]
This is a characteristic of the MOS sensor that is the image sensor of the camera,
and is not a malfunction.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent or LED
lighting.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as
the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter (202), lowering the
shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal
stripes.
• If flicker or horizontal stripes are noticeable when
recording video, this can be mitigated by fixing the
shutter speed.
Either set [Flkr Decrease] (329), or record in [
]
mode (244).
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (212)
466
16. Materials
The brightness or coloring of the recorded image is different from the
actual scene.
• When recording under lighting such as fluorescent or LED lighting, increasing the
shutter speed may introduce slight changes to brightness or coloring.
These are a result of the characteristics of the light source and do not indicate a
malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under lighting
such as fluorescent, LED, mercury, or sodium lighting, the coloring or screen
brightness may change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
• Pixels may be missing from the image sensor.
Perform [Pixel Refresh]. (359)
Video
Cannot record videos.
• When using a large capacity card, you may not be able to record for a while after
turning on the camera.
Video recording stops in the middle.
• Recording video requires a card of a supported speed class. Use a compatible
card. (24)
Playback sound of the video is small.
• This camera has a wide dynamic range to improve the sound quality and can play
a wide range of sounds. For that reason, depending on the environment recorded,
the playback sound may feel small but this is not a malfunction.
467
16. Materials
In videos, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded audio is very quiet.
• Depending on the recording conditions or the lens used, the sound of aperture and
focus actions may be recorded in videos.
You can set the focus operation during video recording to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
(259).
• Do not block the microphone hole during video recording.
An operation sound is recorded in a video.
• We recommend setting the [ ] mode and record with touch operation if you are
bothered about the operation sounds during recording. (246)
Parts that are not in focus are indicated with Peaking.
• When you are using a [Photo Style] setting which uses an adjusted gamma curve,
such as [V-Log L], the camera may incorrectly detect noise on images as contrast
and indicate it with Peaking. We recommend checking focus with MF Assist before
recording.
Lens
When the lens is attached to another digital camera, manual focus
operation cannot be performed.
• You can use Manual Focus with the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) only if your
model is compatible with the lens.
Refer to the support website below for details:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
468
16. Materials
Playback
Cannot play back.
There are no recorded pictures.
• Folders and images processed on a PC cannot be played on the camera.
We recommend using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to write images from the
PC to the card.
• Some images are not displayed when the [Playback Mode] is set. Set to [Normal
Play]. (361)
Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.
• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be
corrected to black.
We recommend recording images with the flash mode set to [
] or [Red-Eye
Removal] set to [OFF]. (233)
Monitor/Viewfinder
The monitor/viewfinder turns off when the camera is turned on.
• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off]
(37) is activated, and the monitor/viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the monitor display
may switch to the viewfinder display.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change
significantly for an instant.
• This occurs when the shutter button is pressed halfway, or when the subject
brightness changes, making the lens aperture change.
This is not a malfunction.
Cannot switch between the monitor and viewfinder even when [LVF] is
pressed.
• In Self Shot Mode, the display automatically switches to monitor display, and the
[LVF] and eye sensor are disabled.
469
16. Materials
Flash
The flash does not fire.
• The flash becomes unavailable in the following cases.
– The flash is closed.
– Flash set to [
] (Forced Flash Off). (229)
• The flash does not fire when using the following functions:
– [
] mode
– Video recording (238), [4K PHOTO] (162), [Post Focus] (176)
– [ESHTR] (202)
– [Silent Mode] (201)
– [Filter Settings] (224)
470
16. Materials
Wi-Fi Function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Radio waves get disconnected.
Wireless access point is not displayed.
General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Usage near devices that utilize the 2.4 GHz frequency such as microwave ovens
and cordless telephones may result in the radio wave being lost.
Use the camera at a sufficient distance from these devices.
• When the remaining battery level is low, it may not be possible to connect to or
maintain communication with other devices.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be
adversely affected. In such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection.
Move the camera away from the metal surface.
Wireless access point
• Confirm that the connected wireless access point can be used.
• Confirm the radio wave conditions of the wireless access point.
– Move the camera closer to the wireless access point.
– Change the location and angle of the wireless access point.
• Depending on the wireless access point, the radio wave may not be displayed even
though it is present.
– Turn off and then on the wireless access point.
– If the wireless channel of the wireless access point cannot be set automatically,
manually set the channel supported by the camera.
– If the wireless access point SSID is set not to broadcast, it may not be detected.
Enter the SSID, and then connect. (420)
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically
disconnected after specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
471
16. Materials
Connection to a wireless access point cannot be established.
• The wireless access point information set on the camera is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key. (420)
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access
point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point
as well as the status of other wireless devices.
(iOS devices) Wi-Fi connection attempt fails.
• Follow the message displayed to allow connection to the camera. If you still
cannot connect, select the SSID of the camera on the Wi-Fi setup screen of the
smartphone to connect. If the SSID is not displayed, turn off and on the camera,
then perform the connection settings again.
Connection to a smartphone via Wi-Fi cannot be established.
• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to the
camera.
When trying to connect to a PC by Wi-Fi, this does not recognize the
user name and password, and connection is not possible.
• Depending on the version of the OS, there are two types of user account (local
account/Microsoft account).
Ensure you use the local account user name and password.
472
16. Materials
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection.
The camera cannot be connected to the PC using the Wi-Fi function.
• At the time of purchase, this camera is set to use a workgroup name of
“WORKGROUP”.
If you have changed the workgroup name of the PC, this will not be recognized.
In the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, [PC Connection], change the workgroup name of the PC
to which to connect. (427)
• Check that the login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the clock settings of the PC connected to the camera differs considerably
from those of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the PC depending
on the OS.
It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.
Transmission of the image fails midway.
Some images cannot be transmitted.
• Is the size of the image too large?
– Reduce the image size at [Size] (425), and then send.
– Transmit after dividing the video with [Video Divide] (290).
• File format of the video that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(402)
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
• Reset network settings. (359)
However, all information set in [Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] will also be reset.
(With the exception of [LUMIX CLUB])
473
16. Materials
TV, PC, Printer
No image on the TV.
The TV screen is blurry or not colored.
• Confirm the connection with the TV. (434)
VIERA Link is not working.
• Check that the [VIERA Link] of the camera is set to [ON]. (358)
• Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
• Turn off and on the camera.
Cannot communicate with the PC.
• Set the [USB Mode] of the camera to [PC(Storage)]. (357)
• Turn the camera off and on.
Cannot print when the camera is connected to a printer.
• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
• Set the camera’s [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)]. (357)
Others
There is rattling noise from the lens when the camera is turned on or
off, or when the camera is swung.
There is a sound from the lens when recording.
• This is the sound of the lens moving and aperture operation. It is not a malfunction.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
• Reselect the language from the menu using the following procedure:
[ ] [ ] Select desired language (358)
The camera becomes warm.
• The camera surface and back of the monitor may become warm during use, but
this does not indicate a problem with performance or quality.
474
16. Materials
Cautions for Use
The camera
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic
equipment (such as microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit
may be disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise
adversely affecting the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic
fields created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the
pictures and/or sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops
functioning properly, turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC
adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures
and/or sound may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables
supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not keep objects such as credit cards that may be influenced
magnetically close to this unit. The data on these objects may
become corrupted and unusable.
475
16. Materials
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be
damaged and the surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep products made of rubber, PVC or similar materials in
contact with the camera for a long period of time.
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC Coupler,
and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet. Then wipe
the camera with a dry, soft cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a
wrung wet cloth, and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to
clean the camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may
peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
Dirt on the image sensor
If dirt gets inside the mount when changing lenses, depending on the
recording conditions, it may adhere to the image sensor and appear on
the recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid
changing the lens in a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a
lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
476
16. Materials
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the
following when you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow dust off the surface of the image sensor using a commercially available
blower. Do not blow the dust off with excessive power.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount as the image sensor
may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Cleaning the Viewfinder
• As the eye cup cannot be removed, blow away the dust on the viewfinder surface
with a blower (commercially available), gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and
be careful not to remove it.
• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or
Panasonic.
Monitor/Viewfinder
• Do not push hard on the monitor.
This may cause irregular coloration or malfunction.
• Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the monitor/viewfinder
screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots, or spots that light
constantly (red, blue, or green) on the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Though the monitor/viewfinder screen parts are produced with highly controlled
precision technology, some pixels may be inactive or always lit.
The spots will not be recorded on images on a card.
477
16. Materials
Lens
• Do not press the lens with excessive force.
• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the
sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it to
malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the
camera outside or near a window.
• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on
the surface of the lens, the picture may be affected.
Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry
cloth before and after taking pictures.
• Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do
not allow the lens mount contacts
to become dirty.
478
16. Materials
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery.
It is highly sensitive to temperature and humidity, and the effect on
performance increases as the temperature rises or drops.
Keep the contacts
of the charger and battery
clean.
• Wipe them with a dry cloth if they get dirty.
Always remove the battery after use.
• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, etc., and keep away from metallic
objects (clips, etc.) for storage or transport.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the
battery and the contacts are deformed.
• Damage to the camera will result if a battery with deformed contacts is inserted into
the camera.
Dispose of unusable battery.
• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
• The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling
laws. Call the RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal
objects (such as necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if
you touch a battery.
479
16. Materials
AC Adaptor
• The [CHARGE] light may blink under the influence of static electricity or
electromagnetic wave, depending on the charging environment. This phenomenon
has no effects on charging.
• If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the AC adaptor 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
• During usage, the AC adaptor may emit an electrical hum; this is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
Card
Do not leave the card in areas with high temperatures, direct
sunlight, or areas prone to electromagnetic waves and static.
Do not bend or drop the card.
Do not subject the card to strong vibration.
• Otherwise, the card and recorded data may be damaged.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or
carrying the card.
• Do not allow dirt, water or other foreign objects to get into the contacts on the card.
Additionally, do not touch the contacts with your hands.
480
16. Materials
Personal Information
Personal information is stored within the camera and in recorded images.
We recommend that you enhance security by setting a Wi-Fi password
and Wi-Fi function lock to protect personal information. (427, 428)
• Images may contain information that can be used to identify the user, such as
recording dates and times, and location information.
Confirm details carefully before uploading images to a web service.
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to
erroneous operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or
other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct
or indirect damage from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal
information.
When requesting a repair or transferring/disposing of the camera
• After making a copy of personal information, be sure to delete information,
including personal information, such as wireless LAN connection settings that you
have registered or saved within the camera with [Reset Network Settings] (359),
and [Delete account] ([LUMIX CLUB]). (431)
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (67)
• Remove the card from the camera.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above
operations are not possible due to malfunction.
Points to remember when disposing of/transferring the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, so it will not delete the data in the card completely.
We recommend physically destroying the card or using commercially available
PC data deletion software to delete the card data completely when disposing of/
transferring the card.
You are responsible for handling of data on cards.
481
16. Materials
When Not Using the Camera for a Long Period of Time
• Ensure you remove the battery and card from the camera.
If the battery is left in the camera, it may over-discharge, and be rendered unusable
even after charging.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature.
(Recommended temperature: 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F); recommended
humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH)
• If storing for a long period of time, it is recommended that the battery be charged
once per year, fully drained in the camera, then removed from the camera and then
stored again.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in
a closet or a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before recording when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
Image Data
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to
inappropriate handling.
Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
Tripod/Unipod
• Make sure the tripod/unipod is stable when the camera is attached to it.
• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or
unipod.
• Care is required because tightening the screw excessively may damage the
camera, or cause the rating label to come off.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact
with the pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the
lens and pedestal in contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens.
Therefore it is recommended to attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional)
before mounting on the tripod/unipod.
• Please also refer to the operating instructions for the tripod/unipod.
482
16. Materials
Shoulder Strap
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens to the camera body, do not carry the
camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
Wi-Fi Function
Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using devices or computer systems that require more reliable
security than wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures
are taken for safety designs and defects for the systems used.
Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when
using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.
Use of the Wi-Fi function of the camera is presumed to be in
countries where it is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if
used in countries other than those where it is sold, and Panasonic takes
no responsibility for any violations.
There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio
waves may be intercepted by a third party.
Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity
or interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference, such as near microwave ovens.
These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones
that use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in
both devices.
483
16. Materials
Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use
When the camera utilizes its wireless LAN function, wireless networks
(SSID) that you are not authorized to use may be displayed, however
do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as an
unauthorized access.
484
16. Materials
Number of Pictures That Can Be Taken
and Available Recording Time with the
Battery
Listed below are the numbers of pictures that can be taken and the time
lengths available for recording when the supplied battery is being used.
• The number of pictures that can be taken is according to the CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) standards.
• Using a Panasonic SDHC memory card.
• The values listed are approximate.
Recording Pictures (When using monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Number of recordable pictures 270
Recording Pictures (When using viewfinder (LVF))
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Number of recordable pictures 250 (900)
• The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time] in [Power
Save LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] function
works as intended.
(Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
485
16. Materials
Recording Videos (When Using the Monitor)
• Recording with picture quality set to [4K/100M/30p].
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Continuous available recording time (minutes) 80
Actual available recording time (minutes) 40
• Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/60p].
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Continuous available recording time (minutes) 90
Actual available recording time (minutes) 45
• Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/24M/24p].
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Continuous available recording time (minutes) 130
Actual available recording time (minutes) 65
• Actual available recording time is the time available for recording when repeating
actions such as turning the camera on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
486
16. Materials
Playback (When Using the Monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Playback time (minutes) 220
• The number of pictures that can be taken and the available recording time
vary depending on the surrounding environment and the usage conditions.
For example, these will reduce in the following case:
– When the flash is used repeatedly.
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
• If the usage duration drops significantly even when the battery is fully
charged, then the battery is at the end of its service life.
Replace with a new battery.
487
16. Materials
Number of Still Images That Can Be
Taken and Video Recording Time with
Cards
Listed below are the numbers of pictures and the time lengths of videos
that can be recorded on a card.
• The values listed are approximate.
Number of Still Images That Can Be Taken
• When [Aspect Ratio] is set to [4:3]
[Picture Size] L (20M) M (10M) S (5M)
[Quality]
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
16 GB 1450 450 2630 520 4600 570
32 GB 2910 900 5280 1050 9220 1150
64 GB 5810 1810 10510 2110 17640 2290
128 GB 11510 3590 20810 4180 34940 4550
Video Recording Time
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• Video recording time is the total time of all videos that have been recorded.
[Rec Quality]
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/24p]
[FHD/28M/60p] [FHD/20M/30p] [FHD/24M/24p] [HD/10M/30p]
16 GB 20m00s 1h10m 1h35m 1h25m 3h05m
32 GB 41m00s 2h25m 3h15m 2h50m 6h20m
64 GB 1h25m 5h00m 6h40m 5h50m 12h45m
128 GB 2h45m 9h55m 13h15m 11h35m 25h20m
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, number of still
images that can be taken, video recording time vary.
• [9999+] is displayed on the recording screen if the remaining number of still
images that can be taken is 10000 or more.
• The continuous recordable time for videos is displayed on the screen.
488
16. Materials
List of Functions That Can Be Set in
Each Recording Mode
Menu
[Rec] menu
[Aspect Ratio]
[Picture Size]
[Quality]
[Focus Mode]
[AF Sensitivity(Photo)]
[Photo Style]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[Color Space]
[Metering Mode]
[Highlight Shadow]
[i.Dynamic]
[i.Resolution]
[Flash]
[Flash Mode]
[Flash Synchro]
[Flash Adjust.]
[Auto Exposure Comp.]
[Wireless]
[Wireless Channel]
[Communication Light]
[Wireless Setup]
[Red-Eye Removal]
489
16. Materials
Menu
[ISO Sensitivity
(photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Min. Shtr Speed]
[Long Shtr NR]
[Shading Comp.]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Rec])
[Digital Zoom]
[Burst Rate]
[4K PHOTO]
[Rec Method]
[Pre-Burst Recording]
[Self Timer]
[Time Lapse Shot]
[Stop Motion Animation]
[Live View Composite]
[Silent Mode]
[Shutter Type]
[Shutter Delay]
[Bracket]
[HDR]
[Multi Exp.]
[Auto Gain]
[Overlay]
490
16. Materials
Menu
[Motion Picture] Menu
[Rec Quality]
[Snap Movie]
[Focus Mode]
[Continuous AF]
[AF Custom Setting(Video)]
[Photo Style]
[Filter Settings]
[Filter Effect]
[Simultaneous Record w/o
Filter]
[Luminance Level]
[Metering Mode]
[Highlight Shadow]
[i.Dynamic]
[i.Resolution]
[ISO Sensitivity
(video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit
Setting]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit
Setting]
[Diffraction Compensation]
[Stabilizer]
[Operation Mode]
[E-Stabilization (Video)]
[Flkr Decrease]
[Ex. Tele Conv.] ([Motion Picture])
[Digital Zoom]
[Picture Mode in Rec.]
[Self Timer]
[Sound Rec Level Disp.]
[Sound Rec Level Adj.]
[Wind Noise Canceller]
491
16. Materials
Menu
[Wind Cut]
*
1
[Lens Noise Cut]
*
2
[Built-in Mic]
[Built-in Mic Indicator]
[Special Mic.]
*
3
*
1 This item is available only when using an external microphone (optional).
*
2 This item is available only when using an interchangeable lens supporting power
zoom.
*
3 This item is available only when using stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2:
optional).
492
16. Materials
Specifications
The specifications are subject to change for performance enhancement.
Digital camera body (DC-G100):
Information for your safety
Power source: 8.4 V
Power consumption: 2.9 W (when recording with the monitor),
2.0 W (when playing back with the monitor)
<When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032)>
Type
Type Digital Single Lens Mirrorless camera
Recording media SD memory card / SDHC memory card
*
1
/ SDXC
memory card
*
1
*
1 Compliant with UHS-I UHS Speed Class 3
Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Image sensor
Image sensor 4/3″ Live MOS sensor, a total of 21,770,000 pixels,
primary color filter
Effective number of
pixels of the camera
20,300,000 pixels
Recording format for still images
File format for still
images
JPEG (DCF compliant, Exif 2.31 compliant) / RAW
File format for 4K
photos
MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))
493
16. Materials
Picture size
(pixels)
When the aspect ratio setting is [4:3]
[L]: 5184×3888, [M]: 3712×2784, [S]: 2624×1968
4K photo: 3328×2496
When the aspect ratio setting is [3:2]
[L]: 5184×3456, [M]: 3712×2480, [S]: 2624×1752
4K photo: 3504×2336
When the aspect ratio setting is [16:9]
[L]: 5184×2920, [M]: 3840×2160, [S]: 1920×1080
4K photo: 3840×2160
When the aspect ratio setting is [1:1]
[L]: 3888×3888, [M]: 2784×2784, [S]: 1968×1968
4K photo: 2880×2880
Quality Fine / Standard / RAW+Fine / RAW+Standard / RAW
Recording format for video
Video format MP4 (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, AAC (2ch))
Image quality for
video
For details, refer to page 239.
Viewfinder
System Aspect ratio 4:3, 0.4 inches, approx. 3,680,000 dots
equivalent, Color LCD Live Viewfinder
(field of view ratio about 100%)
Magnification Approx. 0.73× (35 mm film camera equivalent)
(–1.0 m
–1
50 mm at infinity, with aspect ratio set to [4:3])
Eye point Approx. 20 mm (at –1.0 m
–1
)
Diopter adjustment
range
–4.0 to +2.0 diopter
494
16. Materials
Monitor
System Aspect ratio 3:2, 3.0 inches,
approx. 1,840,000 dots monitor, capacitive touch screen
(field of view ratio about 100%)
Focus
AF type TTL type based on image detection (Contrast AF)
Focus mode AFS / AFF / AFC / MF
AF mode Face/Eye Detection, Tracking, 49-area-focusing,
Custom Multi, 1-area-focusing, Pinpoint-focusing
(Focus area selection is possible by touching.)
Exposure control
Light metering
system,
Light metering mode
1728-zone metering,
multi-metering / center-weighted metering / spot
metering
Metering range EV 0 to EV 18
(F2.0 lens, ISO100 conversion)
Exposure Program AE (P) / Aperture-Priority AE (A) / Shutter-
Priority AE (S) / Manual Exposure (M)
Exposure
compensation
1/3 EV steps, ±5 EV
ISO sensitivity
(standard output
sensitivity)
AUTO / Intelligent ISO / 200 to 25600,
When [Extended ISO] is set: AUTO / 100 to 25600,
1/3 EV steps
White balance
AWB / AWBc / AWBw / Daylight / Cloudy / Shade / Incandescent lights / Flash /
White set 1, 2, 3, 4 / Color temperature 1, 2, 3, 4
495
16. Materials
Shutter
Format Electronically-controlled, Single curtain focal-plane
shutter
Shutter speed Pictures:
Electronic front curtain: Time (max. approx.
60 seconds), 60 seconds to 1/500 of a second
Electronic shutter: 1 second to 1/16000 of a second
Videos:
1/25
*
2
of a second to 1/16000 of a second
*
2 When [Exposure Mode] is set to [M] in [ ] mode
and focus mode is set to [MF], this can be set up
to 1/2
Burst recording
Electronic front
curtain
High
speed
6 frames/second ([AFS], [MF]) /
5 frames/second ([AFF], [AFC])
Medium
speed
4 frames/second
Low
speed
2 frames/second
Electronic shutter High
speed
10 frames/second
Medium
speed
4 frames/second
Low
speed
2 frames/second
Maximum number of
frames recordable
Without RAW files: 480 frames or more
With RAW files: 20 frames or more
(When recording is performed under the test conditions
specified by Panasonic)
Minimum illumination
Approx. 9 lx (when i-Low light is used, the shutter speed is 1/30th of a second)
<When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used>
496
16. Materials
Flash
Flash TTL AUTO Built-in pop up flash GN 5.1 equivalent
(ISO200·m)
[GN 3.6 equivalent (ISO100·m)]
Flash mode Auto, Auto/Red-Eye, Forced Flash On,
Forced On/Red-Eye, Slow Sync., Slow Sync./Red-Eye,
Forced Flash Off
Flash
synchronization
speed
Equal to or smaller than 1/50 of a second
Flash range Approx. 0.4 m (1.3 feet) to 4.1 m (13 feet)
<When the Interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is
mounted, WIDE, [ISO AUTO] is set>
Zoom
Digital Zoom Max. 2x
Extended Tele
Conversion
When taking still pictures:
Max. 2.0x (When a picture size of [S] is selected.)
When recording video:
2.7x (FHD)/4.0x (HD)
Display language
[ENGLISH]/[DEUTSCH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ITALIANO]/[ESPAÑOL]/[繁體中文]/
[PORTUGUÊS]/[日本語]
Microphone / Speaker
Microphone Stereo
Speaker Monaural
Interface
[HDMI] micro HDMI Type D
[USB/CHARGE] USB 2.0 (High Speed)/USB 2.0 Micro-B
[MIC] Ø 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
497
16. Materials
External dimensions / Mass
External dimensions Approx. 115.6 mm (W)×82.5 mm (H)×54.2 mm (D)
(4.55″ (W)×3.24″ (H)×2.13″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 345 g/0.76 lb (with one card and the battery)
Approx. 303 g/0.66 lb (only camera body)
Operating environment
Recommended
operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Permissible relative
humidity
10%RH to 80%RH
This camera complies with the “Design rule for Camera File system” (DCF) and
“Exchangeable Image File Format” (Exif) standards established by “Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association” (JEITA). The camera cannot play
back files that do not comply with the DCF standard. Exif is a file format for pictures
which allows recording information, etc. to be added.
498
16. Materials
Interchangeable
Lens
H-FS12032
“LUMIX G VARIO 12–32 mm/F3.5–5.6 ASPH./MEGA
O.I.S.”
Focal length f=12 mm to 32 mm (35 mm film camera equivalent: 24 mm
to 64 mm)
Aperture type 7 diaphragm blades/circular aperture diaphragm
Maximum aperture F3.5 (Wide) to F5.6 (Tele)
Minimum aperture
value
F22
Lens construction 8 elements in 7 groups
(3 aspherical lenses, 1 ED lens)
In focus distance 0.2 m (0.66 feet) to
(from the focus distance reference
line) (focal length 12 mm to 20 mm), 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to
(from the focus distance reference line) (focal length
21 mm to 32 mm)
Maximum image
magnification
0.13x (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.26x)
Optical Image
Stabilizer
Available
Mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Angle of view 84° (Wide) to 37° (Tele)
Filter diameter 37 mm
Max. diameter Ø 55.5 mm (2.2 inch)
Overall length Approx. 24 mm (0.94 inch)
(from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount
when the lens barrel is recessed)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 67 g/0.15 lb
Recommended
operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Permissible relative
humidity
10%RH to 80%RH
499
16. Materials
Tripod grip: DMW-SHGR1
Carrying capacity
(Total mass of the
loading camera
body, lens, battery,
and other attached
accessories)
Maximum 1.2 kg/2.65 lb
External dimensions
(Legs folded)
Approx. 53.7 mm (W)×144.7 mm (H)×45.5 mm (D)
(2.11″ (W)×5.70″ (H)×1.79″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
External dimensions
(Legs opened)
Approx. 150.5 mm (W)×113.7 mm (H)×133.4 mm (D)
(5.93″ (W)×4.48″ (H)×5.25″ (D))
(excluding the projecting parts)
Length of the
connection cable
Approx. 160 mm (6.30″)
Mass (Weight) Approx. 102 g/0.22 lb
Recommended
operating
temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Permissible relative
humidity
10%RH to 80%RH
500
Index
Numerics
1-Area (AF) ........................................ 139
49-Area (AF) ...................................... 135
4K Burst ............................................. 163
4K Burst (Wide-angle) ......................... 88
4K burst files ...................................... 168
4K Burst (S/S).................................... 163
4K Live Cropping ....................... 247, 312
4K PHOTO ................................ 162, 321
4K PHOTO Bulk Saving ............ 175, 364
4K PHOTO Play ................................ 295
4K Pre-Burst ...................................... 163
5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer .......... 205
A
AC adaptor ................................ 451, 479
AF ...................................................... 126
AF After Countdown .......................... 348
AF Area Display ................................. 335
AF Assist Lamp.................................. 333
AF Custom Setting(Video) ......... 260, 327
AF Mode ............................................ 129
AF Sensitivity(Photo) ......................... 128
AF/AE Lock................................ 210, 331
AF/AE Lock Hold ............................... 331
AF+AE ............................................... 143
AF+MF ............................................... 336
AFC ................................................... 124
AFF .................................................... 124
AF-ON ................................................211
AFS.................................................... 124
Android .............................................. 374
Aperture Bracket................................ 198
Aperture Ring Increment ................... 348
Aperture-Priority AE mode ................... 93
Appetizing Food................................. 109
Approved Regulations ....................... 359
Artistic Nightscape ............................. 108
Aspect Ratio ...............................117, 314
Auto Clock Set ........................... 354, 397
Auto exposure compensation .... 233, 318
Auto focus.......................................... 126
Auto LVF/Monitor Off ................... 37, 355
Auto Marking function ........................ 174
Auto Review ...................................... 340
Auto Transfer ............................. 354, 393
Auto White Balance ........................... 216
Automatic scene detection .................. 76
AV device (Wi-Fi Connections) .......... 412
Available recording time .................... 484
Available recording time
(for video recording) .......................... 487
B
Backlight compensation....................... 75
Backlit Softness ................................. 107
Battery ......................................... 31, 478
Beep .................................................. 354
Bleach Bypass .................................... 112
Blinking Highlights ............................. 344
Bluetooth ................................... 354, 375
Bracketing.................................. 195, 323
Bright Blue Sky .................................. 108
Built-in Mic. ........................................ 265
Built-in Mic Indicator .......................... 266
Built-in microphone setting
(Self Shot)............................................ 86
Bulb ................................................... 389
Burst rate ................................... 159, 321
Burst Shot .......................................... 158
501
Index
C
Calendar Playback ............................ 277
Card ....................................... 24, 39, 479
Center Marker.................................... 344
Center-weighted metering ................. 207
Charge ................................................. 31
Cinelike D .......................................... 221
Cinelike V .......................................... 221
Cleaning ............................................ 475
Clear Night Portrait ............................ 109
Clear Nightscape ............................... 108
Clear Portrait ..................................... 107
Clear Retouch.................................... 284
Clear Sports Shot .............................. 109
Clock Set ..................................... 45, 352
Cloud Limit......................................... 425
Cloud sync service ............................ 416
Color Space ............................... 315, 439
Color Tone ......................................... 222
Communication Light ................. 237, 318
Compression rate .......................119, 314
Condensation ...................................... 21
Constant Preview .............................. 341
Continuous AF ........................... 259, 327
Continuous available recording time
........................................................... 485
Contrast ............................................. 222
Control dial .......................................... 53
Cool Night Sky ................................... 108
Creating a picture from a video ......... 274
Creative Control menu....................... 313
Creative Control mode........................110
Creative Video menu ......................... 312
Creative Video mode ......................... 244
Cropping ............................................ 367
Cross Process ....................................112
Custom menu .................................... 331
Custom mode .................................... 303
Custom Mode menu .......................... 304
Custom set memory .................. 303, 352
Cute Dessert...................................... 109
D
DC Coupler ........................................ 451
DCF standard .................................... 497
Defocus control function ...............82, 115
Delete ................................................ 279
Delete All Images............................... 369
Delete Confirmation ........................... 369
Delete Location Data ......................... 425
Delete Single ..................................... 279
Demo Mode ....................................... 359
Device Name ..................................... 427
Dial Operation Switch Setup...... 297, 338
Dial Setting ........................................ 338
Diffraction Compensation .................. 321
Digital Zoom .............................. 155, 321
Diopter adjustment .............................. 55
Direct Focus Area .............................. 334
Distinct Scenery................................. 108
Drive mode ........................................ 157
Dynamic Monochrome........................112
E
Economy...................................... 37, 355
Electronic front curtain ............... 202, 322
Electronic shutter ....................... 202, 322
Enlarged Display ............................... 275
Entering characters ........................... 370
E-Stabilization (Video) ............... 205, 321
Exposure Bracket .............................. 198
Exposure compensation .................... 208
502
Index
Exposure Compensation Display Setting
........................................................... 337
Exposure Compensation Reset ......... 331
Exposure Meter ................................. 345
Exposure Mode ......................... 244, 312
Expressive ..........................................112
Extended ISO .................................... 331
Extended Tele Conversion
........................................... 152, 321, 329
External flash ..................................... 447
External microphone.......................... 448
Eye cup.............................................. 476
Eye sensor......................................... 356
Eye Sensor AF................................... 332
F
Face Rec Edit .................................... 364
Face recognition ................................ 349
Face/Eye Detection ........................... 131
Fantasy ............................................... 112
File number................ 121, 123, 439, 459
Filter Effect .........................111, 224, 314
Filter Settings............................. 224, 314
Firmware update.................................. 20
Firmware Version............................... 358
Flash .................................................. 226
Flash adjustment ....................... 231, 318
Flash Mode ................................ 227, 318
Flash setting .............................. 227, 318
Flash Synchro............................ 232, 318
Flicker Decrease................................ 329
Fn button ........................................... 292
Fn Button Set............................. 293, 337
Focus ......................................... 126, 259
Focus Area Set .................................. 294
Focus Bracket.................................... 199
Focus mode ....................................... 124
Focus Ring Lock ................................ 339
Focus Stacking .................................. 181
Focus Switching for Vert/Hor ............. 335
Focus/Release Priority ...................... 334
Folder number ........... 121, 123, 439, 459
Folder/File Settings.................... 121, 359
Forced Flash Off ................................ 227
Format ......................................... 40, 359
Frame Marker ............................ 268, 344
Freeze Animal Motion ........................ 109
Front dial.............................................. 53
G
Gamma setting (Photo Style) ............ 221
Glistening Water ................................ 108
Glittering Illuminations ....................... 108
Grain Effect ........................................ 223
Group image ...................................... 278
Guide Line ......................................... 343
H
Half Press Release ............................ 331
Handheld Night Shot ......................... 109
HDAVI Control™ ................................ 435
HDMI Info Display (Rec) .................... 358
HDMI micro cable .............. 432, 434, 436
HDMI Mode (Play) ............................. 357
HDMI socket ...................................... 432
HDR ................................................... 323
High Dynamic .....................................112
High Key .............................................112
Highlight Shadow............................... 316
Histogram .......................................... 343
Hot shoe cover .................................. 447
I
i.Dynamic ........................................... 317
503
Index
i.ISO................................................... 213
i.Resolution ........................................ 317
iHandheld Night Shot................... 79, 312
iHDR ............................................ 79, 312
Image Quality .................................... 222
Image Stabilizer ......................... 204, 321
Impressive Art ..................................... 112
Intelligent Auto menu ......................... 312
Intelligent Auto mode ........................... 74
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode ................... 77
Intelligent ISO .................................... 213
iOS..................................................... 374
ISO Displayed Setting ....................... 337
ISO Increments.................................. 331
ISO sensitivity .................................... 212
ISO Sensitivity (photo) ....................... 319
ISO Sensitivity (video) ............... 262, 328
L
L.Monochrome................................... 221
L.Monochrome D ............................... 221
Language........................................... 358
Lens ............................................... 23, 41
Lens Fn Button Setting ...................... 347
Lens Noise Cut .................................. 264
Lens Position Resume....................... 347
Level Gauge ...................................... 294
Level Gauge Adjustment ................... 359
Light Composition .............................. 280
Live View Boost ................................. 341
Live View Composite Recording ........ 101
Location Logging ....................... 354, 395
Log recording..................................... 269
Long Exposure NR ............................ 320
Looped Focus Frame ........................ 335
Low illumination AF............................ 127
Low Key .............................................. 112
Luminance Level ....................... 261, 328
LUMIX CLUB ..................................... 428
LUMIX Sync....................................... 374
LVF Display Speed ............................ 355
LVF Luminance .................................. 356
LVF/Monitor Display Set .................... 345
LVF/Monitor Display Style ................. 294
LVF/Monitor Switch ............................ 356
M
Manual Exposure mode....................... 98
Manual focus ..................................... 146
Menu Guide ....................................... 346
Metering Mode........................... 207, 315
MF ............................................. 124, 146
MF Assist ........................................... 336
MF Assist Display .............................. 336
MF Guide ........................................... 345
Miniature Effect ...................................112
Minimum Shutter Speed .................... 319
Monitor......................................... 44, 452
Monitor Display .................................. 356
Monitor Display Speed ...................... 355
Monitor Luminance ............................ 356
Monitor recording information screen
............................................... 58, 63, 456
Monochrome...............................109, 112
Monochrome (Photo Style) ................ 221
Monochrome Live View ..................... 340
Motion Picture menu.......................... 327
Multi-metering .................................... 207
Multiple Exposure .............................. 325
My Menu ............................................ 305
My Menu Setting................................ 306
504
Index
N
Natural (Photo Style) ......................... 221
Network Address ............................... 428
No.Reset.................................... 123, 359
Noise Reduction ................................ 222
Number of pictures that can be taken
........................................................... 484
Number of pictures that can be taken
continuously....................................... 160
Number of prints ................................ 445
Number of still images that can be taken
........................................................... 487
O
Old Days ............................................. 112
One Point Color ..................................112
One Push AE ..................................... 294
Online Manual ................................... 352
Operation Lock Setting ...................... 339
Optical zoom...................................... 151
P
Page Layout ...................................... 445
Paper Size ......................................... 445
PC connection ................... 407, 427, 438
Peaking.............................................. 342
Photo Style ................................ 221, 314
PHOTOfunSTUDIO ........................... 441
PictBridge .......................................... 444
Picture mode in recording.................. 329
Picture Size ................................118, 314
Picture Sort ........................................ 368
Pinpoint (AF)...................................... 140
Pinpoint AF Setting ............................ 332
Pixel Refresh ..................................... 359
Play back ........................................... 270
Play back picture ............................... 270
Play back video ................................. 272
Playback menu .................................. 360
Playback Mode .................................. 361
Portrait (Photo Style) ......................... 221
Post-Focus ........................................ 176
Power Save LVF Shooting ........... 37, 355
Power Zoom Lens ..................... 156, 347
Pre-Burst Recording .................. 165, 321
Preview .............................................. 104
Print ........................................... 410, 444
Print with Date ................................... 445
Profile Setup ...................................... 351
Program AE mode ............................... 91
Program Shift....................................... 92
Protect ............................................... 362
Q
Q.MENU .............................. 61, 299, 337
Quality ........................................119, 314
Quick AF ............................................ 332
Quick menu ................................. 61, 299
R
Rating ................................................ 362
RAW ...................................................119
RAW Processing ....................... 286, 364
Rec Area ............................................ 346
Rec Menu .......................................... 314
Rec Quality (Video) ................... 239, 327
Rec/Playback Switch ......................... 295
Recording distance reference............ 150
Recording mode .................................. 52
Recording videos ............................... 238
Recording with Time Lapse Shot
................................................... 187, 322
Red REC Frame Indicator ................. 346
505
Index
Red-Eye Removal ..................... 233, 319
Register to Favorite
(Wi-Fi connection) ............................. 422
Relaxing Tone .................................... 108
Remaining display ............................. 346
Remote shooting ............................... 387
Remote Wakeup ........................ 354, 396
Reset ........................................... 67, 359
Reset Network Settings ..................... 359
Resize................................................ 366
Restore to default .............................. 295
Retro ................................................... 112
Returning from Sleep Mode....... 354, 390
Romantic Sunset Glow ...................... 108
Rotate ................................................ 367
Rotate Display ................................... 368
Rough Monochrome ...........................112
S
S&Q Effect ......................................... 254
S&Q Exposure Mode ......................... 253
S&Q Recording Frame Rate.............. 253
Saturation .......................................... 222
Scene Guide menu ............................ 313
Scene Guide mode ............................ 105
Scene Switch ..................................... 313
Scenery (Photo Style)........................ 221
SD Speed Class .................................. 24
Self Shot ............................................ 348
Self Shot Mode .................................... 83
Self Timer Auto Off ............................ 348
Self-timer ................................... 184, 322
Send Image (Smartphone)
........................................... 354, 404, 406
Sending file format............................. 425
Sending size ...................................... 425
Sepia ..................................................112
Sequence Composition ..................... 282
Setup menu ....................................... 352
Shading compensation ...................... 320
Sharpness ......................................... 222
Shoulder strap ..................................... 30
Shutter AF.......................................... 331
Shutter Delay ............................. 102, 323
Shutter Remote Control ..................... 389
Shutter Type .............................. 202, 322
Shutter-Priority AE mode ..................... 96
Silent Mode................................ 201, 322
Silky Monochrome ..............................112
Silky Skin ........................................... 107
Simultaneous Record w/o Filter
............................................111, 225, 313
Sleep Mode ................................. 37, 355
Sleep Mode (Wi-Fi)...................... 37, 355
Slide show ......................................... 361
Slow & Quick Menu ................... 253, 313
Slow & Quick Mode ........................... 250
Snap Movie........................................ 255
Soft Focus ..........................................112
Soft Image of a Flower ...................... 109
Sound recording level adjustment
................................................... 263, 329
Sound recording level display.... 263, 329
Special Mic. ............................... 330, 450
Spot metering .................................... 207
Standard (Photo Style) ...................... 221
Star Filter ............................................112
Starlight AF ........................................ 127
Stereo Shotgun Microphone ...... 330, 448
Stop Motion Animation............... 190, 322
Stop Motion Video ............................. 368
Storage (recorder) ............................. 443
Sunshine.............................................112
506
Index
T
T (Time) ............................................. 100
Text Stamp......................................... 365
Thumbnail screen .............................. 276
Time Lapse Video .............................. 368
Title Edit ............................................. 363
Touch AE ............................................. 69
Touch AF.............................. 68, 142, 339
Touch Pad AF ............................ 144, 339
Touch screen ....................................... 54
Touch Settings ................................... 339
Touch Shutter ...................................... 68
Touch Tab .......................................... 339
Touch Zoom ....................................... 153
Toy Effect ............................................ 112
Toy Pop...............................................112
Tracking (AF) ............................... 78, 133
Travel Date ........................................ 353
Tripod ................................................ 481
Tripod grip ........................................... 70
TV Connection ................................... 357
TV playback ....................................... 434
U
UHS Speed Class................................ 24
USB connection cable
..................... 33, 357, 433, 438, 443, 444
USB Mode ......................................... 357
USB/CHARGE socket ................. 33, 433
V
Vertical orientation detection function
............................................................. 49
Video Divide .............................. 290, 367
Video rec. button ................. 51, 238, 339
Video Speed Class .............................. 24
VIERA Link ................................ 358, 435
Viewfinder ............................ 55, 356, 452
Vivid ................................................... 221
Vivid Sunset Glow ............................. 108
V-Log L .............................................. 269
W
Warm Glowing Nightscape ................ 108
Web service ....................................... 414
White balance .................................... 215
White balance adjustment ................. 219
White Balance Bracket ...................... 200
Wi-Fi .......................................... 353, 371
Wi-Fi Function ........................... 353, 371
Wi-Fi Function Lock ........................... 428
Wi-Fi network settings ....................... 354
Wi-Fi Password ................................. 427
Wi-Fi Setup menu ...................... 353, 427
Wind Cut .................................... 330, 450
Wind Noise Canceller ................ 264, 330
Wireless ..................................... 235, 318
Wireless Channel ...................... 235, 318
Wireless Connection Lamp........ 354, 371
Wireless flash .................................... 234
Wireless printing ................................ 410
Wireless Setup .......................... 236, 318
World Time ........................................ 352
WPS .......................................... 418, 421
Z
Zebra Pattern............................. 267, 344
Zoom ................................................. 151
507
Trademarks and Licenses
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European
Union and other countries.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI
Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator,
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Windows is either registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
• iMovie, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Google, Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
508
Trademarks and Licenses
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi
Alliance
®
.
• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation. DynaFont is a
registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks, or
certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.
• Other names, company names, and product names mentioned in these instructions
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
509
Trademarks and Licenses
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use
of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode
video in compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC
Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was
obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted
or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from
MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
Firmware Update
■ Firmware Has Been Updated
A firmware update has been made available to improve camera capabilities and to
add functionality.
The subsequent sections describe functions that have been added or modified.
Also refer to the “Owner’s Manual”.
• To check the firmware version of the camera, select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup]
menu.
• For the latest information on the firmware or to download/update the firmware, visit
the following support site:
https://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(English only)
Click here to move to the cover page of the “Owner’s Manual”.
F-2
[Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)] and [Vertical Image
Flip(Monitor)] Have Been Added to [LVF/Monitor
Disp. Set]
It is now possible to set whether the screen flips or not depending on the
facing or angle of the monitor during recording.
[ ] [ ] [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set]
Select [Horizontal Image Flip(Monitor)]/[Vertical Image Flip(Monitor)]
[Horizontal Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
The screen automatically flips horizontally
according to the angle to which the monitor is
opened or closed.
[ON] The screen is flipped horizontally all the time.
[OFF] Screen is not flipped.
[Vertical Image
Flip(Monitor)]
[AUTO]
The screen automatically flips vertically
according to the angle to which the monitor is
rotated.
[ON] The screen is flipped vertically all the time.
[OFF] Screen is not flipped.
• The default setting is [AUTO].
• The settings for this function are not reflected in the playback screen.
Firmware Ver. 1.1
